Technical Publications RT 3200 Advantage

GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
Direction 46-030370
Revision 3
P9893KM
RT 3200 Advantage - I
Operator Manual
Copyright© 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996 by General Electric Company
Operating Documentation
GE Medical Systems
GE Medical Systems: Telex: 3797371
P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)
GE Medical Systems—Europe:
283 rue de la Miniére BP34
78533 BUC Cedex
REVISION HISTORY
REV
0
1
2
3
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
August 5, 1993
June 15, 1994
October 9, 1995
July 12, 1996
Initial Release
Version 5 Software
MZ Probe Addition
CK Probe Addition
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
PAGE
NUMBER
REVISION
NUMBER
Title Page
A and B
i thru viii
ix thru xiv
Report on Publication
1-1 and 1-2
1-3 and 1-4
1-5 and 1-6
1-7 thru 1-18
2-1 thru 2-4
2-5 and 2-6
3-1 and 3-2
3-3 thru 3-6
3
3
3
1
0
0
3
1
0
0
1
0
1
PAGE
NUMBER
3-7 thru 3-14
3-15 and 3-16
4-1 thru 4-10
5-1 thru 5-24
5-25 and 5-26
5-27 and 5-28
5-29 thru 5-30
5-31 and 5-32
5-33 thru 5-36
6-1 thru 6-30
6-31 and 6-32
6-33 thru 6-42
6-43 thru 6-54
REVISION
NUMBER
0
1
0
0
3
1
0
3
2
0
2
0
1
PAGE
NUMBER
REVISION
NUMBER
6-55 thru 6-62
7-1 thru 7-12
7-13 thru 7-36
8-1 thru 8-16
9-1 and 9-2
A-1 and A-2
A-3 thru A-6
B-1 and B-2
C-1 thru C-8
D-1 and D-2
E-1 thru E-4
10-1 thru 10-42
Index-1 thru Index-6
0
3
0
2
0
0
3
0
3
0
0
3
3
Please verify that you are using the latest revision of this document. Information pertaining
to this document is maintained on GPC (GE Medical Systems Global Product Configuration).
If you need to know the latest revision, contact the GE Ultrasound Clinical Answer Center at
1-800-682-5327 or 414-524-5255.
46-030370 REV 3
REVISION HISTORY
A
This page intentionally left blank.
B
REVISION HISTORY
46-030370 REV 3
Table of Contents
SECTION
PAGE
Revision History ................................................................................................................................................ A
Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................................ i
Safety ................................................................................................................................................................ ix
Report on Publication
SECTION 1—INTRODUCTION
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 1-3
Features ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Standard Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 1-4
Available Options ................................................................................................................................1-4
Standard Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 1-5
RT 3200 Advantage - I Dimensions ................................................................................................... 1-6
Hardware Description ........................................................................................................................ 1-8
Display Formats ...............................................................................................................................1-10
1-8-1 Single B-Mode Format ........................................................................................................ 1-10
1-8-2 Dual B-Mode Format ........................................................................................................... 1-11
1-8-3 B/M-Mode Format ................................................................................................................ 1-11
System Set-up ..................................................................................................................................1-12
1-9-1 Connection of a Probe to the System ................................................................................. 1-12
1-9-2 Probe Storage & Cable Arm Support .................................................................................. 1-13
1-9-3 Power-up .............................................................................................................................1-14
1-9-4 Adjustment of Monitor Contrast and Brightness ................................................................. 1-15
1-9-5 Monitor Height Adjustment .................................................................................................. 1-16
1-9-6 Foot Switch Connection ...................................................................................................... 1-18
SECTION 2—FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD
2-1
Description of Front Panel ................................................................................................................. 2-3
46-030370 REV 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
i
Table of Contents (continued)
SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 3—DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
Entering Patient Information .............................................................................................................. 3-3
3-1-1 New Patient Key ................................................................................................................... 3-3
3-1-2 ID/Name Key ........................................................................................................................ 3-3
Selecting a Probe ...............................................................................................................................3-3
Scan Image Adjustment ..................................................................................................................... 3-4
3-3-1 Echo Gain Control ................................................................................................................ 3-4
3-3-2 TGC Slide Pots ..................................................................................................................... 3-4
3-3-3 Dynamic Range .................................................................................................................... 3-4
3-3-4 Focus Selections .................................................................................................................. 3-5
3-3-5 Image Direction Keys ........................................................................................................... 3-5
3-3-6 Display Scale Keys ............................................................................................................... 3-5
3-3-7 Image Scroll Keys ................................................................................................................. 3-6
3-3-8 Preset Parameters Key ......................................................................................................... 3-7
3-3-9 B-Mode Display Selection ..................................................................................................... 3-7
3-3-10 B/M-Mode Display Selection ................................................................................................. 3-8
3-3-11 M-Mode Display Selection .................................................................................................... 3-8
3-3-12 Sweep Speed ....................................................................................................................... 3-9
3-3-13 Multiple Image Display .......................................................................................................... 3-9
3-3-14 Freeze Key ..........................................................................................................................3-12
3-3-15 Body Pattern Controls ........................................................................................................ 3-12
3-3-16 Comment Key ..................................................................................................................... 3-14
3-3-17 Keyboard Illumination ......................................................................................................... 3-14
3-3-18 Record Key ..........................................................................................................................3-14
3-3-19 Ext Video Key ..................................................................................................................... 3-14
Measurement Keys ...........................................................................................................................3-15
Function Keys ...................................................................................................................................3-16
Single Keystroke Operation ............................................................................................................. 3-16
SECTION 4—GENERIC MEASUREMENTS
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
ii
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 4-3
Distance Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 4-4
Circumference Measurement ............................................................................................................ 4-6
Area Measurement .............................................................................................................................4-8
Measurement Calculation Error Messages ...................................................................................... 4-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
46-030370 REV 3
Table of Contents (continued)
SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 5—CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
B-Mode Presetting ..............................................................................................................................5-4
Clock Readjustment ...........................................................................................................................5-5
Text/Graphics Display On/Off ............................................................................................................ 5-7
Echo Level .......................................................................................................................................... 5-8
5-4-1 Echo Level Measurement (fixed area) .................................................................................. 5-8
5-4-2 Echo Level Measurement (arbitrary area) ............................................................................ 5-9
Histogram ......................................................................................................................................... 5-12
5-5-1 Histogram (fixed area) ........................................................................................................ 5-12
5-5-2 Histogram (an arbitrary area) .............................................................................................. 5-13
Film Development Time ................................................................................................................... 5-15
Gestational Data ...............................................................................................................................5-16
5-7-1 Programming Gestational Age Data ................................................................................... 5-16
5-7-2 Editing Gestational Age Data .............................................................................................. 5-18
Hospital Name ..................................................................................................................................5-20
Inverse .............................................................................................................................................. 5-21
Body Pattern Package ..................................................................................................................... 5-22
High Frame Rate On/Off .................................................................................................................. 5-24
Biopsy Guideline ..............................................................................................................................5-25
Map Package ...................................................................................................................................5-33
Dotted Line On/Off............................................................................................................................5-33
Record Output (Gamma Curve Selection) ....................................................................................... 5-34
Frame Averaging On/Off ................................................................................................................. 5-35
SECTION 6—FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-1
6-2
6-3
OB Tbl 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 6-4
6-1-1 BPD (Biparietal Diameter) .................................................................................................... 6-4
6-1-2 CRL (Crown Rump Length) .................................................................................................. 6-6
6-1-3 FL (Femur Length) ................................................................................................................ 6-8
6-1-4 AC (Abdominal Circumference) .......................................................................................... 6-10
6-1-5 HC (Head Circumference) .................................................................................................. 6-12
6-1-6 AC/HC (Two Diameter Method) .......................................................................................... 6-14
OB Tbl 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6-2-1 Programming Gestational Age Data ................................................................................... 6-16
6-2-2 Editing Gestational Age Data .............................................................................................. 6-18
Calc 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 6-22
6-3-1 Circumference .................................................................................................................... 6-23
6-3-2 Volume .................................................................................................................................6-25
6-3-3 Heart Rate ...........................................................................................................................6-33
6-3-4 Velocity ................................................................................................................................6-35
6-3-5 A/B (Calculation of Ratio) ................................................................................................... 6-37
46-030370 REV 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
iii
Table of Contents (continued)
SECTION
6-4
6-5
PAGE
Calc 2 ............................................................................................................................................... 6-39
6-4-1 Estimated Date of Confinement .......................................................................................... 6-40
6-4-2 Estimated Fetal Body Weight ....................................................................................................
6-41
6-4-3 Stepper Volume .................................................................................................................. 6-43
6-4-4 Amniotic Fluid Index ........................................................................................................... 6-54
Mapping ............................................................................................................................................ 6-57
SECTION 7—UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-4
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 7-3
Basic Urology Measurements ............................................................................................................ 7-3
7.0 MHz Transaxial Probe ................................................................................................................. 7-3
7-3-1 Description .............................................................................................................................7-3
7-3-2 Parts List ................................................................................................................................7-3
7-3-3 RA Probe Factory Presets .................................................................................................... 7-4
7-3-4 RA Probe Preparation .......................................................................................................... 7-4
7-3-5 Transrectal Scanning—with Water Path (OPTIONAL) ......................................................... 7-5
7-3-6 Use of RA Probe with Volume Stepper Device ..................................................................... 7-5
7-3-7 System Preparation .............................................................................................................. 7-7
7-3-8 Infection Control ................................................................................................................... 7-7
7-3-9 Patient Preparation for Transrectal Imaging ......................................................................... 7-7
7-3-10 Patient Scan ......................................................................................................................... 7-9
Mechanical Stepper/Needle Placement Guide ................................................................................ 7-13
7-3-1 Parts Identification .............................................................................................................. 7-13
7-3-2 Control/Adjustment Description .......................................................................................... 7-15
7-3-3 Alternate Assembly ............................................................................................................. 7-17
7-3-4 Lithotomy (Stirrup) Table Mounting ..................................................................................... 7-19
7-3-5 Typical Use ..........................................................................................................................7-20
7-3-6 Periodic Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 7-21
7-3-7 Cleaning and Sterilization ................................................................................................... 7-22
7-3-8 Replacement Parts ............................................................................................................. 7-22
Stepper Volume Calculation ............................................................................................................ 7-23
7-4-1 Stepper Volume Formula .................................................................................................... 7-23
7-4-2 Basic Principles of Operation .............................................................................................. 7-24
7-4-3 Stepper Volume Increment Selection ................................................................................. 7-25
7-4-4 Scan Preparation ................................................................................................................ 7-26
7-4-5 Area Measurements for Each Slice (Step Increment) ......................................................... 7-28
SECTION 8—ACCESSORIES
8-1
8-2
iv
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 8-3
Accessory Panels ...............................................................................................................................8-3
8-2-1 Lower Accessory Panel ........................................................................................................ 8-3
8-2-2 Upper Accessory Panel ........................................................................................................ 8-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
46-030370 REV 3
Table of Contents (continued)
SECTION
8-3
8-4
8-5
PAGE
Sony Video Graphic Printer Installation ............................................................................................. 8-6
8-3-1 System Disassembly ............................................................................................................ 8-6
8-3-2 Page Printer Power Hook-up ................................................................................................ 8-6
8-3-3 System Re-assembly ............................................................................................................ 8-7
8-3-4 Mount and Secure Printer Shelf ............................................................................................ 8-8
8-3-5 Mount and Connect the Printer ............................................................................................. 8-8
Panasonic AG-5200/AG-1260/AG-1270/ Sony SVO-1410 Basic Installation .................................. 8-10
8-4-1 System Disassembly .......................................................................................................... 8-10
8-4-2 VCR Power Hook-up .......................................................................................................... 8-10
8-4-3 System Re-assembly .......................................................................................................... 8-10
8-4-4 Mount and Connect VCR ..................................................................................................... 8-11
Connecting A Multi-Image Camera .................................................................................................. 8-14
SECTION 9—APPENDICES
APPENDIX A—CONTROL PARAMETERS
A-1
A-2
Control Parameters ........................................................................................................................... A-1
Control Parameters Which Affect Acoustic Sound ............................................................................. A-1
APPENDIX B—ACOUSTIC LEVEL NOTES
B-1
B-2
Acoustic Level Notes ......................................................................................................................... B-1
Measurement Basis for Probe Output ............................................................................................... B-1
APPENDIX C—CLEANING AND INSPECTING
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-6
Overview ........................................................................................................................................... C-1
Probe Cleaning .................................................................................................................................. C-1
Disinfection ........................................................................................................................................ C-2
Gas Sterilization ................................................................................................................................ C-3
C-5-1 Console Surfaces ................................................................................................................. C-7
C-5-2 Monitor Face and Filter ......................................................................................................... C-7
System Cleaning ............................................................................................................................... C-7
C-5-3 Video Cassette Recorder ...................................................................................................... C-8
C-5-4 Multi-Imaging Device ............................................................................................................ C-8
C-5-5 Page Printer .......................................................................................................................... C-8
Monthly Inspection............................................................................................................................. C-8
APPENDIX D—TROUBLESHOOTING
D-1
D-2
D-3
Overview ........................................................................................................................................... D-1
Troubleshooting the RT 3200 Advantage - I ...................................................................................... D-1
Troubleshooting the Page Printer ...................................................................................................... D-2
46-030370 REV 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
v
Table of Contents (continued)
SECTION
PAGE
APPENDIX E—MAINTENANCE
E-1
E-2
E-3
E-4
E-5
Check-up and Service ....................................................................................................................... E-1
How to Store the Unit ........................................................................................................................ E-1
How to Move a Unit ........................................................................................................................... E-2
Monitor Preparation and Installation .................................................................................................. E-3
Removing the Monitor ....................................................................................................................... E-4
SECTION 10—RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-10
vi
Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 10-3
Ellipse Measurement Function ........................................................................................................ 10-4
HIP Dysplasia Calculation ............................................................................................................... 10-6
Estimated Fetal Body Weight —Third Calculation ........................................................................... 10-9
Gestational Summary Report Page ............................................................................................... 10-10
10-5-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................10-10
10-5-2 Displaying and Exiting the Report Page ........................................................................... 10-11
10-5-3 Editing the Report Page.................................................................................................... 10-11
10-5-4 Edit Fields ..........................................................................................................................10-13
10-5-5 Independent Data Fields ................................................................................................... 10-15
10-5-6 Dependent Data Fields ..................................................................................................... 10-20
10-5-7 Gestational Age Error Markers ......................................................................................... 10-21
10-5-8 Hardcopy Output of the Report Page ............................................................................... 10-22
10-5-9 Gestational Age Estimation .............................................................................................. 10-23
10-5-10 Measurement Averaging Page ......................................................................................... 10-24
Report Page Sequencing .............................................................................................................. 10-25
Measurement Averaging Page ...................................................................................................... 10-26
10-7-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................10-26
10-7-2 The Report Display ........................................................................................................... 10-26
10-7-4 Average All ........................................................................................................................10-27
10-7-3 Editing the Page ............................................................................................................... 10-27
Anatomical Survey Report Page ................................................................................................... 10-28
10-8-1 Page Description .............................................................................................................. 10-28
10-8-2 Editing the Page ............................................................................................................... 10-29
10-8-3 Comments .........................................................................................................................10-29
10-8-4 User Programmed Features ............................................................................................. 10-29
User Programmable Comments Library ........................................................................................ 10-30
10-9-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................10-30
10-9-2 Selecting the Comments Library ....................................................................................... 10-30
10-9-3 Programming Comments .................................................................................................. 10-31
10-9-4 Editing the Comments Library .......................................................................................... 10-32
10-9-5 Using the Comments Library ............................................................................................ 10-33
10-9-6 No Code ............................................................................................................................10-33
Urology Summary Report Page ..................................................................................................... 10-34
10-10-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................10-34
10-10-2 Urology Page Edit Fields .................................................................................................. 10-35
10-10-3 Display Urology Report Page ........................................................................................... 10-36
TABLE OF CONTENTS
46-030370 REV 3
Table of Contents (continued)
SECTION
10-11
10-12
10-13
10-14
PAGE
Record Output—Line Printer ......................................................................................................... 10-36
Prostate Body Marker Patterns ..................................................................................................... 10-37
Calc 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 10-38
Cine Memory Operation (OPTION) ............................................................................................... 10-39
10-14-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................10-39
10-14-2 Single Image Operation .................................................................................................... 10-39
10-14-3 Multiple Image Operation .................................................................................................. 10-40
46-030370 REV 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
vii
This page intentionally left blank.
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
46-030370 REV 3
SAFETY
The following is intended to make the equipment user aware of particular
hazards associated with the use of this equipment and the extent to which
injury can occur if precautions are not observed.
Additional precautions may be provided throughout the manual. The user
is obligated to be familiar with these concerns and avoid conditions that
could result in injury.
Before using the equipment, carefully study this manual. Keep this manual
at hand for quick reference. Review it periodically for warnings, safety
precautions and maintenance requirements.
WARNINGS AND SYMBOLS
Precautionary statements and warning labels are provided in various
locations on your RT 3200 console and throughout this manual to alert the
user to hazards or situations that could result in injury to equipment damage.
Symbols are often used with these warnings to increase user awareness
and emphasize particular hazards. The user should become familiar with
the meaning of symbols and the intent of all product warnings and precautionary statements.
Various levels of safety precaution are highlighted in this manual by the
following symbols and flag words which precede the precautionary statement.
CAUTION
Indicates that a potential hazard may exist which
through inappropriate conditions or actions will
or can cause:
•
•
Minor injury
Property damage.
WARNING
Indicates that a specific hazard is known to exist
which through inappropriate conditions or actions may cause:
•
•
Severe personal injury
Substantial property damage.
DANGER
Indicates that a specific hazard is known to exist
which through inappropriate conditions or actions will cause:
•
•
46-030370 REV 1
Severe or fatal personal injury
Substantial property damage.
WARNING AND PREFACE
ix
WARNINGS AND SYMBOLS (continued)
Indicates a note or attention statement. This will
be used for:
•
•
Noting or emphasizing a necessary operator
action
Step or time saving recommendations.
Symbols may also be used to identify particular hazards associated with the
precautionary statement. The following symbols are used for the purpose
indicated and may be used in combination with the level of concern symbols
as described above:
Electrical
Hazard
Electrical Potential Hazard:
• Electrical micro-shock to patient, i.e. ventricular fibrillation initiated
• Electrical macro-shock to patient/user.
Explosion
Hazard
Explosion Potential Hazard:
Biological
Hazard
Biological Potential Hazard:
• Risk of explosion if used in the presence of
flammable anesthetics.
• Patient/user infection due to contaminated
equipment
• Patient/user injury or adverse reaction to
contact materials.
Acoustic
Output
Hazard
x
WARNING AND PREFACE
Acoustic Output Potential Hazard:
• Patient injury or tissue damage from ultrasound radiation.
46-030370 REV 1
WARNINGS AND SYMBOLS (continued)
Additionally, the following symbols have the meaning as indicated:
!
"ATTENTION—Consult accompanying documents" is intended to alert the user to refer to the
operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the
label.
"Main OFF" indicates the power off position of
the main power switch.
"Main ON" indicates the power on position of the
main power switch.
"VCR" indicates controls or connections related
to a video cassette recorder.
"Protective Earth" indicates the protective earth
(grounding) terminal.
"Equipotentiality" indicates the terminal to be
used for connecting equipotential conductors
when interconnecting (grounding) with other
equipment.
46-030370 REV 1
WARNING AND PREFACE
xi
PATIENT SAFETY
WARNING
The concerns listed below can seriously affect the safety of patient undergoing a diagnostic ultrasound examination.
Patient Identification
Always include proper identification with all patient data and verify the accuracy of the patient's
name or ID numbers when entering such data.
Make sure correct patient ID is provided on all
recorded data and hard copy prints. Identification errors could result in an incorrect diagnosis.
Diagnostic Information Equipment malfunction or incorrect settings can
result in measurement errors or failure to detect
details within the image. The equipment user
must become thoroughly familiar with the equipment operation in order to optimize its performance and recognize possible malfunctions.
Applications training is available through your
GE representative. Added confidence in your
equipment operation can be gained by establishing a quality assurance program.
Mechanical Hazards
Damaged probes or improper use and manipulation of intracavitary probes can result in injury
or increased risk of infection. Inspect probes
often for sharp, pointed, or rough surface damage that could cause injury or tear protective
barriers. Never use excessive force when manipulating intracavitary probes. Become familiar with all instructions and precautions provided
with special purpose probes.
Electrical Hazards
A damaged probe may cause an electrically
hazardous condition when coupled to the human
body. Before each use, inspect the probe for
cracks or openings in the cable, aperture,
headshell, shaft or body.
Do not use a damaged probe to scan patients. A
damaged probe may also produce inaccurate
scan images.
Acoustic Hazards
Although there have been no confirmed adverse
effects produced by diagnostic levels of ultrasound, avoid unnecessary prolonged exposure
to the human body.
Follow the principle of "as low as reasonably
achievable" when scanning patients. Once an
optimal image is achieved, the need for increasing acoustic output or prolonging the exposure
can not be justified.
Acoustic intensities for this device are below
FDA specified limits for the indicated clinical
applications and will not be exceeded for any
system control setting combinations.
xii
WARNING AND PREFACE
46-030370 REV 1
EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL SAFETY
DANGER
Electrical
Hazard
Risk of explosion if used in the presence of flammable anesthetics.
Risk of Electric Shock
Infection Control
Prescription Device
This equipment contains dangerous voltages
that are capable of serious injury or death. To
avoid injury:
•
Do not remove protective covers. No user
serviceable parts are inside. Refer servicing
to qualified service personnel.
•
To assure adequate grounding, connect the
attachment plug to a reliable (hospital grade)
grounding outlet. Do not use a two prong AC
adapter.
•
Do not place liquids on or above the console.
Spilled liquid may contact live parts and
increase the risk or shock.
For patient and personnel safety, beware of
biological hazards while performing invasive
procedures. To avoid the risk of disease transmission:
•
Use protective barriers (gloves and probe
sheaths) whenever possible. Follow sterile
procedures when appropriate.
•
Thoroughly clean probes and reusable accessories after each patient examination
and disinfect or sterilize as needed.
•
Follow all infection control policies established by your office, department or institution as they apply to personnel and equipment.
CAUTION: Federal law restricts this device to
sale or use by or on the order of a physician.
Only qualified sonographers should perform
ultrasound scanning on human subjects for
medical diagnostic reasons.
46-030370 REV 1
WARNING AND PREFACE
xiii
EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL SAFETY (continued)
Calculation Formulas
and Databases
Calculation formulas and databases are provided
only as a tool and should not be considered as
an undisputed database in which clinical diagnosis can be made. Research should be done
on the articles. Output data from this device
should be sampled. A judgement can then be
made as to the utility of this device and the
calculation results as a clinical tool.
Refer to the bibliographies annotated with each
table.
xiv
WARNING AND PREFACE
46-030370 REV 1
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
Overview
Features
Standard Configuration
Available Options
Standard Specifications
RT 3200 Advantage - I Dimensions
Hardware Description
Display Formats
System Set-up
46-030370 REV 0
INTRODUCTION
1-1
This page intentionally left blank.
1-2
INTRODUCTION
46-030370 REV 0
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1-1 Overview
The RT 3200 Advantage - I is an ultrasonic diagnostic system equipped for
linear, convex and micro-convex scanning. It may be used in many areas such
as obstetrics, gynecology, urology and radiology. The optional 7 MHz transrectal probe gives the RT 3200 Advantage - I urology scanning capabilities.
The RT 3200 Advantage - I produces high-quality images employing
dynamic focus on transmit and continuous focus on receive. It is equipped
with functions to enhance the clinical diagnosis, such as display mode
selections, measurements and calculations.
The affordable price, advanced features and options, probe selections, size,
weight and portability make the RT 3200 Advantage - I an ideal system for
the office or hospital.
1-2 Features
1. High Resolution Image
Provides high resolution by using continuous dynamic focus, a highdensity probe with multiple matching layers, and hypersensitive electronic circuitry.
2. Multiple Diagnostic Functions
RT 3200 Advantage I has various functions useful for daily diagnosis
such as various display modes, image optimization, measurements
and calculations.
3. Programmable Preset Function
B-Mode preset function enables the user to program optimum values
such as gain for each probe type in advance. This makes a diagnosis
more efficient because the preset conditions will be retained even after
the power switch is turned off or a different probe is selected.
4. Scroll
This function is available for linear and convex probes, which broadens
a diagnostic area.
5. Analog TGC
By using eight slide-type analog TGC pots, the sonographer is able to
optimize the RT 3200 Advantage - I image.
6. Sophisticated Console Design
The design of RT 3200 Advantage - I is excellent from the human
engineering point of view. The height of the monitor can be adjusted to suit
everyone's viewing needs. It is lightweight, compact and very portable.
7. Optional Probe Types
The RT 3200 Advantage - I will accept a wide variety of scanning probes
from linear, to convex, to transvaginal for OB, and transrectal for
urology studies.
3
46-030370 REV 02
INTRODUCTION
1-3
1-3 Standard Configuration
Unit
• Operation console
• TV monitor (12 inches)
Probe
• Convex electronic probe (CB type)
• Cable hook arm
• Probe holder
Record
• Thermal Printer
Accessories
• Ultrasonic scan gel
• Spare fuse
• Conversion connector
• Operator manual
• Foot switch
1-4 Available Options
Probe related options
• A type linear electronic probe (5MHz, 40mm FOV)
• B type linear electronic probe (3.5MHz, 85mm FOV)
• C type linear electronic probe (3.5MHz, 130mm FOV)
• D type linear electronic probe (3.5MHz, 85mm FOV, biopsy)
•
•
•
•
E type linear electronic probe (5MHz, 85mm FOV)
F type linear electronic probe (5MHz, 54mm FOV, operation)
G type linear electronic probe (5MHz, 54mm FOV, body cavity)
H type linear electronic probe (7.5MHz, 60mm FOV)
•
LP type linear electronic probe (7.5Mhz, 63mm FOV, small parts/breast)
•
•
•
•
S type convex electronic probe (3.5 MHz, 80°)
R type micro-convex electronic probe (7MHz, endocavitary)
RA type micro-convex electronic probe (7MHz transrectal)
MZ type convex electronic probe (6.5 MHz, 120°, endocavitary)
•
•
•
•
CA type convex electronic probe (5MHz, 60°, 40mm radius)
CB type convex electronic probe (3.5MHz, 60°, 40mm radius)
CC type convex electronic probe (3.5 MHz, 60°, 80mm radius)
CK (CF) type convex electronic probe (3.5 MHz, 73°, 50mm radius)
•
•
•
CV type micro-convex electronic probe (5MHz, 80°, transvaginal)
ATF type micro-convex electronic probe (5MHz, 120°, transvaginal)
ATV type micro-convex electronic probe (5MHz, 95°, transvaginal)
Recording Devices
• VCR
• Multi-format camera
1-4
INTRODUCTION
32
46-030370 REV 0
1-5 Standard Specifications
Scanning :
Display mode :
Beam focus :
Scale :
Convex and linear electronic scanning
B-, B/M-, M-Mode
Real-time continuous dynamic focus on receive. Selectable and combination focus on transmit
4 depth selections
Display Monitor :
12 inch monochrome
Dynamic range :
30 - 72dB (6dB steps)
Gain :
0 - 99dB (1dB steps)
TGC :
8 slide pots (at fixed depths)
Post process :
Vertical Scroll :
Memory :
Measurements :
Calculation :
Gestation table :
Biopsy guidelines :
Image direction :
Body markers :
Text display :
Automatic display :
Weight (lb) :
Temperature/Humidity
Requirements :
Electrical Requirements :
46-030370 REV 012
Gray Scale Mapping selections
Micro-convex probe/linear probe (Mode dependent)
32 frame, continuous loop Cine memory (optional)
Distance:
4 results simultaneously
Circumference: 4 results simultaneously by 3 methods
Area:
4 results simultaneously
Circumference, velocity, volume, ratio, etc.
OB Calc Package
2 Tables. 5 selections per table (5 factory stored and 5 user programmable)
Varies with probe type.
Invert/Reverse RT 3200 Advantage - I display
Abdomen, OB/GYN, Neck and Head
Alphanumeric keyboard
Clock, scan parameters & probe type.
Approx. 182 lb
Tall version approx. 189 lb
Operating: 50°-99.9°F (10°-40°C) at 30-75% Relative Humidity (RH)
Heat Dissipation: 650/BTU per hour (1 person = 300 BTU per hour)
Storage: 32°-122°F (0°-50°C) at 10-85% RH
Transport: 32°-122°F (0°-50°C) at 5-80% RH
Line:
Domestic (115V)—for unit as shipped, 115V~, 48-63 Hz, singlephase, fused at T2 amps.
Line: International (220/240V)—for unit as shipped, 220/240V~, 48-63
Hz, single-phase, fused at T2 amps.
Allowable Line Noise: Decaying oscillation transients of less than 15%
nominal peak voltage; voltage transients of less
than 25% nominal peak voltage.
System Leakage Current: Enclosure or chassis—less than 100 microamps.
Ordinary Patient Connections—less than 50
microamps.
INTRODUCTION
1-5
1-6 RT 3200 Advantage - I
Dimensions
Illustration 1-1
Front View System Dimensions
▲
15.9 (405)
▲
48 (1200)
*52 (1300)
▼
▲
* = TALL VERSION
UNITS = INCHES (MM)
31.3 (795)
*33.8 (859)
1
2
RS-232C
Ext TV
Ext TV
In
Out
Camera &
TV Printer
In
Out
Video Out
12Vdc
Foot Switch
for Camera
Shutter
Caution
6.4 (162)
See Operating Manual
for connection.
▼
▼
▼
15.7 (400)
1-6
INTRODUCTION
46-030370 REV 0
12
Illustration 1-2
Side View System Dimensions
<
<
31.8 (808)
28.3 (720)
>
>
UNITS = INCHES (MM)
46-030370 REV 0
INTRODUCTION
1-7
1-7 Hardware Description
See Illustration 1-3 which note the following:
1. Power switch
Used to turn on/off the main AC power to the system.
2. Probe arm
Used to support the probe cable. Keeps the cable off of the floor.
3. Probe holder, gel holder
Used to hold scan probes and scan gel.
4. Upper panel
Used to connect a VCR or page printer. (Under top coverplate)
5. Alphanumeric Keyboard
Used to change scan parameters, enter the text, or to select various
function menus.
6. 12-inch monochrome monitor
It displays the ultrasound image and scan parameter data.
7. Adjustment of contrast and brightness
These controls adjust the contrast and brightness of the display to the
operators preference.
8. Adjustment of monitor height
The height of the monitor can be adjusted by pressing and holding this
button while raising and lowering the monitor.
9. Probe connectors
Connects up to two probes to the system at one time.
10. Front panel
Used to connect the system to a camera, VCR, page printer or external
monitor.
11. Wheel locks
Used to lock wheel rotation in order to prevent accidental system
movement. To lock wheels, depress the lever with your foot.
12. Handle
Used to aid in the movement of the system and to wrap power cord
around when transporting.
1-8
INTRODUCTION
46-030370 REV 0
Illustration 1-3
Hardware Description
6
7
4
8
5
2
1
12
3
1
9
2
RS-232C
Ext TV
Ext TV
In
Out
Camera &
TV Printer
In
Out
Video Out
Shutter
12Vdc
Foot Switch
10
for Camera
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.
11
46-030370 REV 0
INTRODUCTION
1-9
1-8 Display Formats
1-8-1 Single B-Mode
Format
Illustration 1-4
Single B-Mode Format
Name of Hospital
GE
Probe Type
Date
Time
Frequency
Scale Size
Distance
Circumference
Area
GE
G
MeE
eddiiccaall
M
M
i //99l11
4//1d
155
00
4
110
0::5599::4455
C
B
3
z
B
H
C
B
M
35
5M
B
M
HHzH
0
1.51
0.5M
zz
x33
xx 11..0..0
Scan Direction Indicator
Horizontal Range Marker
2
2
2
1100
D++
D
D
D
Dxx++
xx
xx
xxx
x
C
Cxxx++
C
x++
Cxx
Cxxxx
A
+
A+
Axxxx
xx
xx
x
A
Ax+x+
x
xx
xx
Vertical
Depth
Marker
Area for Calc Display
ID:
ID
ID:
I1D
234
12:34
1234
Patient name
NA
MEE::
N
AM
S
TH
SMMIIT
H
JO
OHN
J HN
G46D66T50
Gain
Body Pattern
Dynamic Range
Transmitting Focus
1-10
INTRODUCTION
46-030370 REV 0
1-8-2 Dual B-Mode
Format
Illustration 1-5
Dual B-Mode Format
Scan Direction
←
GEE
G
G
ME
M
e
eddiiccaall
0
4/115
04
5/9911
1B
:4
5
1003::.5599M
:4H5
z
B3.5MHz
C
B
M
H
3
5
B
M
H
3
5
1
0
x
C
B
3
.
5
M
Hzz
x 1..0. z
2
2
2
CB
1305MH
D++
D
xx
x
xx
C++
C
Cxx
xx
xx
A+
Axx+
xx
xx
ID:
ID:
I1D
234
12:34
1234
NAAMMEE::
N
S
SM
MIITTHH
JOHN
G46D66T50
JOHN
Body Pattern Displays
1-8-3 B/M-Mode Format
Illustration 1-6
B/M-Mode Format
Scan Direction
GEE
G
G
MeE
M
eddiiccaall
0
4/115
04
5//9911
11
:559
:4
9M
4M
C003B
B
H55zHz
3
:
.55:M
B
5.M
HzHz
C3B..3
C
B
HH
3B
30M
5M
15
xx1..0 z z
←
2
2
2
10
D
D++
xx
x
xx
C
+
C+
Cxx
xx
xx+
A+
Axx+
xx
xx
ID:
ID:
I1D
234
1234
1234
NAAMMEE::
N
S
SMMIITTHH
JOHN
JOHN
G46D66T50
Body Pattern Display
46-030370 REV 0
INTRODUCTION
1-11
1-9 System Set-up
1-9-1 Connection of a
Probe to the
System
Illustration 1-7
Probe Connection
1
2
1. Insert a RT 3200 Advantage - I probe into the Probe 1 or Probe 2
connectors located on the panel below the keyboard. (See Illustration
1-3.)
2. Lock the probe to the system connector by turning the knob clockwise.
(See Illustration 1-7.)
CAUTION
1-12
INTRODUCTION
Make sure that the name of the probe is right side up.
46-030370 REV 0
1-9-2 Probe Storage &
Cable Arm
Support
Illustration 1-8
Probe Storage
Cable arm
Probe holder
1. Place the probe element assembly in the probe holder, as shown in
Illustration 1-8.
2. Drape the probe cable on to the cable arm support also shown in
Illustration 1-8.
CAUTION
46-030370 REV 0
The probe element face is fragile. Mechanical shock could destroy
individual probe elements.
INTRODUCTION
1-13
1-9-3 Power-up
Turn on system power by pressing the power switch to the "I" (ON) position.
1. After the power switch is turned on, the system will beep twice.
2. The LEDs on the front panel will flash on and the system performs its
initialization routine.
3. A few seconds later, the single B-Mode display format will appear on the
monitor. The initial parameters at power up are shown in Table 1-1.
NOTE: Ideally, the unit needs to warm up for 30 minutes before it is
ready and stabilized.
Table 1-1
Initial Parameter Selections
Initial Parameter Selections
MODE
FUNCTION SELECTIONS
FOCUS
SCALE
GAIN
DYNAMIC RANGE
MAP
IMAGE INVERSE
IMAGE REVERSE
1-14
INTRODUCTION
B (LED ON)
OFF
Values depend on B-Mode parameter
presets programmed for the probe
selected.
46-030370 REV 0
1-9-4 Adjustment of
Monitor Contrast
and Brightness
Adjust the brightness and contrast of the display to the room lighting by using
the controls under the left, front corner of the monitor (see Illustration 1-9).
1. This control adjusts the brightness. The brightness will increase as the
control is turned counterclockwise.
2. This control adjusts contrast. The picture will become lighter as the
control is turned counterclockwise.
Illustration 1-9
Monitor Display Adjustment
1
46-030370 REV 0
2
INTRODUCTION
1-15
To avoid injury by tipping over, SET THE MONITOR TO THE LOWEST POSITION BEFORE MOVING.
Pour éviter ie basculement accidentel de la machine, BAISSER LE MONITEUR AVANT DÉPLACEMENT.
Um bei bewegung des Gerätes Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, STELLEN SIE DEN MONITOR AUF
DIE NIEDRIGSTE POSITION EIN.
PREDISPORRE IL MONITOR NELLA POSIZIONE PIU BASSA PRIMA DI MUOVERE la macchina per
evitare rischi di rottura.
Para evitar daños por voltearse el sistema, POSICIONE EL MONITOR A SU NIVEL MÁS BAJO ANTES
DE MOVER EL SISTEMA.
!
1-16
INTRODUCTION
Para evitar daños por voltearse el sistema, NO MUEVA EL SISTEMA DESDE LOS LADOS.
To avoid injury by tipping over, DO NOT PUSH THIS UNIT FROM THE SIDES.
Pour éviter ie basculement accidentel de la machine, NE PAS LA POUSSER PAR LE CÔTÉ.
Um bei bewegung des Gerätes Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, SCHIEBEN SIE DEN
MONITOR NICHT VON DER SEITE.
Per evitare rischi di rottura, NON SPINGERE LA MACCHINA DI LATO.
1-9-5 Monitor Height
Adjustment
Always lower the monitor as much as
possible before moving the unit.
46-030370 REV 0
Illustration 1-10
Monitor Height Adjustment
Adjustment Button
1-9-5 Monitor Height
Adjustment
(continued)
To adjust the height of the display monitor, depress and hold down the
adjustment button.
While depressing the button, firmly raise or lower the display monitor to the
desired height.
Release the adjustment button to lock the monitor to the desired height.
46-030370 REV 0
INTRODUCTION
1-17
a
a
1-9-6 Foot Switch
Connection
A remote freeze foot switch is provided as standard equipment.
The foot switch is connected to the lower accessory panel as shown in
Illustration 1-11.
The foot switch can be placed close to your work in order to quickly and
conveniently capture the images necessary for measurement and recording.
Illustration 1-11
Foot Switch Connection
RS-232C
Ext TV
In
Ext TV
Out
Camera &
TV Printer
In
Out
Video Out
Shutter
12Vdc
Foot Switch
for Camera
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.
FREEZE
a
1-18
INTRODUCTION
46-030370 REV 0
SECTION 2
FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD
Description of Front Panel
46-030370 REV 0
FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD
2-1
This page intentionally left blank.
2-2
FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD
46-030370 REV 0
SECTION 2
FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD
Illustration 2-1
Front Panel
New
Patient
ID
Name
Comment
Erase
Ext
Video
Preset
1
Key
Light
Probe
2
Function
)
(
1
2
4
3
Q
S
Z
Shift
!
G
F
D
C
X
7
Y
T
R
=
"
6
5
E
W
A
?
Space
8
U
H
B
V
~
N
0
9
K
M
-
BS
P
O
I
J
%
+
L
.
Space
Return
/
Shift
Control
Enter
OB
Tbl 1
OB
Tbl 2
Calc 1
Calc 2
Calc 3
Map
Mode
Image Direction
Rvs
Inv
Body Pattern
Rotation
L
Center
-
TGC
R
Sel
Measurement
Dist
Set
Trace
Area
B
B/M
High Sweep
Speed
Low
M
Off
Focus
Meas
1
2
3
4
Comb
Scale
+
Depth
cm
0
Dynamic Range
x0.7
20cm
x1.0
15cm
x2.0
7.5cm
x1.5
10cm
2.5
Scroll
5
Record
7.5
10
12.5
Gain
Multi Image
15
Freeze
17.5
2-1 Description of Front
Panel
New
Patient
ID
Name
46-030370 REV 0
When this key is depressed the system will be reset to the same conditions
as when the power was turned on. It erases all the data and measurements
of the preceding patients. It will not erase the body pattern.
Used to enter patient ID No. and NAME. Press once to enter ID. Press again
to enter NAME. Press a third time to disable the function.
FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD
2-3
2-1 Description of Front
Panel (continued)
Comment
Used to enable the placement of comments in the image area. The
TRACKBALL can be used for cursor placement.
Erase
This key must be pressed twice in order to erase the image, comments,
measurements and calculations. This key will not erase Body Patterns.
Preset
Used to select preset scan parameters for the active probe. Parameters are
programmable using the Control, B Function.
Ext
Video
Key
Light
1
Probe
2
This key enables an external video signal (i.e. VCR option) to be processed
through the system to the monitor.
This key will turn on or off the soft green backlight to the keyboard.
Used to select a probe for scanning from the two that may be attached.
Function
OB
Tbl 1
OB
Tbl 2
Calc 1
Calc 2
Calc 3
Map
These keys are used to call up preset program menus to select OB
calculation tables, Advanced Calculation packages and Gray Scale Mapping selections.
The Calc 3 selection is not operational in the RT 3200 Advantage - I.
Image Direction
Rvs
Inv
The image display can be reversed (left and right), or inverted (top and
bottom) when the appropriate key is pressed.
Body Pattern
Rotation
2-4
L
R
A group of body patterns will be enabled for display when these keys are
depressed.
Center
Sel
The rotation knob is used to rotate transducer position on body pattern.
FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD
46-030370 REV 0
2-1 Description of Front
Panel (continued)
Measurement
Trace
Area
Dist
Set
-
These keys will be used when measurement procedures are required.
Off
Meas
TGC
+
cm
These slide pots adjust the gain at 8 specific depth levels.
0
2.5
5
7.5
10
12.5
15
17.5
Dynamic Range
Gain
These keys are used to adjust dynamic range of the image in B- and MModes.
This control is used to adjust the receiver gain in B- and M-Modes.
When in Freeze mode, this control is used to step frame by frame through
the optional 32 frame Cine memory found in Version 5 software.
Trackball
46-030370 REV 01
This control is used to move a cursor while making comments and to make
measurements.
FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD
2-5
2-1 Description of Front
Panel (continued)
Mode
B
B/M
M
These keys are used to select a display mode format.
High Sweep
Speed
Low
This key is used to change the display speed in M-Mode.
4
Comb
These keys are used to assign the optimum transmit focal zone.
x1.5
10cm
x2.0
7.5cm
These keys are used to change the depth (magnification) of an image
display.
Focus
1
2
3
Scale
Depth
x0.7
20cm
x1.0
15cm
Scroll
These keys are used to scroll an image. It varies the depth at which the
displayed images start.
Record
This key is used to trigger a camera or page printer.
Multi Image
These keys are used to display and move between multiple image displays.
Freeze
2-6
Used to freeze an image. Stops the acquisition of ultrasound data.
FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD
1
46-030370 REV 0
SECTION 3
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
Entering Patient Information
Selecting a Probe
Scan Image Adjustment
Measurement Keys
Function Keys
46-030370 REV 0
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
3-1
This page intentionally left blank.
3-2
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
46-030370 REV 0
SECTION 3
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
3-1 Entering Patient
Information
3-1-1 New Patient Key
New
Patient
This key is used to erase the image and data from the previous patient. All
ID/Name, image, scan parameters, comment cursor, measurement cursor,
biopsy guidelines, body pattern and probe mark will be erased.
NOTE: If this key is depressed when the image is frozen, the freeze will
be released to return to the real-time mode. Scan parameters
will return to the preset values (See Control Key Functions
CONTROL, B)
3-1-2 ID/Name Key
ID
Name
Press this key once and the LED will light.
First, enter the patient’s ID number by using the alphanumeric keys (8 letters
x 2 lines maximum). When the ID/NAME key is pressed a second time, the
system will accept patient name input. Enter the patient’s name using the
alphanumeric keys (8 letters x 3 lines maximum). To correct any error, use
the BACKSPACE key.
When the ID and Name have been input correctly, press the ENTER key.
(The underline cursor and the ID/NAME LED will go off.)
NOTE: If the COMMENT key is pressed while entering the ID and/or
Name, the underline cursor and ID/NAME LED will go off and
the newly selected function will be enabled. When the ID/
NAME key is pressed while Name is being entered, the underline cursor and ID/NAME LED will go off. The information
which was put in before the key is depressed will remain on the
monitor.
3-2 Selecting a Probe
1
2
Probe
46-030370 REV 1
0
Press this key to toggle between the two probes that can be attached to the
system simultaneously. An LED will light (1 or 2) to indicate the active probe.
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
3-3
3-3 Scan Image Adjustment
3-3-1 Echo Gain
Control
The GAIN control knob is used to adjust the amplification of the returning
echoes.
Gain
Receiver gain increases as the knob is turned clockwise. It decreases as
the knob is turned counterclockwise. Gain is displayed on the monitor in a
range from 0 to 99dB in 1 dB increments.
In Freeze Mode, with Version 5 software, the GAIN control knob is used to
advance frames forward and backward through the optional 32 frame Cine
memory. Counterclockwise rotation advances back to previous image
frames. After frame 32, the display wraps around to the first frame.
Clockwise rotation advances frame by frame through optional Cine memory
in the opposite direction.
3-3-2 TGC Slide Pots
The TGC SLIDE POTS are used to adjust the gain at a specific depth.
-
TGC
+
cm
0
2.5
5
The upper TGC slide pots corresponds to the body surface and the lower
TGC slide pots corresponds to the deeper part of the body. Adjust the slide
pot for the specific part of the image you wish to optimize. Move the slide
pot to the right of the center to increase gain or to the left of center to
decrease gain.
7.5
10
12.5
15
17.5
3-3-3 Dynamic Range
Dynamic Range
The DYNAMIC RANGE ARROW keys are used to adjust the echo level
range displayed by the gray scale. Press the UP ARROW key to increase
Dynamic Range. The image will become softer with more shades of gray.
Press the DOWN ARROW key to decrease Dynamic Range. The image will
become more contrasty.
The dynamic range available is 30-72dB in 6dB increments.
3-4
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
46-030370 REV 0
1
3-3-4 Focus Selections
Focus
1
2
3
4
Comb
The 5 FOCUS keys are used to select the optimum focal zone for transmit.
Keys 1-4 select single focus depths. The COMB key combines dynamic
focusing for depths 2, 3, 4. See Table 3-1 on the following page.
NOTE: The FOCUS function selects the transmit focus depth only.
The receive signal employs continuous dynamic focus.
Table 3-1
Focus Depth
Focus
Selection
Transmit
Focus Depth*
Type H and LP
Probe Transmit
Focus Depth
1
2
3
4
Comb
20mm
40mm
60mm
100mm
40, 60, 100mm
9mm
18mm
27mm
36mm
9, 18, 27mm
*For probes A, B, C, D, E, G, CA, CB, CC, CV.
3-3-5 Image Direction
Keys
The left-side and right-side orientation of an image can be reversed when
the RVS key is depressed. The image will return to the opposite orientation
when the RVS key is depressed again.
Image Direction
Rvs
Inv
The top and bottom image orientation can be inverted when the INV key is
depressed. The image orientation will return to the opposite state when the
key is depressed again.
NOTE: These functions do not work when an image is frozen.
3-3-6 Display Scale
Keys
Scale
Depth
x0.7
20cm
x1.0
15cm
x1.5
10cm
x2.0
7.5cm
The SCALE function will determine the size of the image on the monitor. The
monitor will display the image according to the selected magnification. Four
scale sizes can be selected (x0.7, x1.0, x1.5, x2.0) by pressing the desired
key.
Magnification
Depth (cm)
x0.7
20
x1
15
x1.5
10
x2.0
7.5
NOTE: With a 12 inch monitor, x1 yields an actual size image. The
width of the image is automatically decided based on a selected magnification.
If a SCALE key is pressed when the image is frozen, the image will unfreeze
and become active.
46-030370 REV 01
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
3-5
3-3-7 Image Scroll
Keys
Scroll
The SCROLL ARROW keys are used to move the image presentation up
in order to display deeper parts of the body. Linear and convex linear probes
can be scrolled in B-, B/M- and M-Modes. A numerical value of a scrolled
depth is displayed in the upper left side of the image in mm. This number
represents the distance from the top of the image to the skin line.
The UP ARROW key scrolls the image in the upward direction. The DOWN
ARROW key scrolls the image in the downward direction.
Illustration 3-1
Scrolled Image Display
NOTE: Frame-rate of a scrolled image may change slightly.
The SCROLL key does not function when the image is in freeze
or when the x0.7 scale factor is selected.
3-6
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
46-030370 REV 0
1
3-3-8 Preset
Parameters Key
Preset
By pressing this key, the system returns to the basic scan parameters stored
for the active probe. The system default parameters can be preset by using
CONTROL, B keys (see page 5-4). The factory default presets set at the
time of shipment are as follows:
Gain
Dynamic Range
Focus
3-3-9 B-Mode Display
Selection
B
50dB
54dB
Level 3
The three MODE keys used to select a display mode format.
Press the B key to display B-Mode.
B-Mode is automatically selected when the power switch is turned on.
NOTE: If the B key is pressed in B/M-Mode or M-Mode, the system will
return to B-Mode and it will retain the current values in BMode. Comments and measurements are erased when a
mode is switched.
Illustration 3-2
B-Mode Display
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 15 : 25
CA 5MHz
1.0
G66D54T60
46-030370 REV 0
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
GE
3-7
3-3-10 B/M-Mode
Display Selection
B/M
When the B/M key is pressed, the system will display B-Mode on the left side
of the display and M-Mode on the right side of the display.
An M-Mode sampling cursor will appear on the B-Mode display. The time
appears on the top of the M-Mode and depth scale appears on the right side
of the M-Mode. The M-Mode sampling cursor can be moved by using the
TRACKBALL. Both B- and M-Mode images can be scrolled (linear and
convex probes only). Dynamic Range and Gain adjustments affect the MMode display only. TGC adjustments affect both B- and M-Mode displays.
Illustration 3-3
B/M-Mode Display
NOTE: If the B key is pressed in B/M-Mode or M-Mode, the system will
return to B-Mode and it will retain the current values in B-Mode.
Comments and measurements are erased when a mode is
switched.
3-3-11 M-Mode Display
Selection
M
When the M key is pressed, the system will display M-Mode only across the
entire display.
Depth is displayed as the latest scale selected in B/M-Mode.
Scroll functions are capable in M-Mode only with linear and convex probes.
To switch from B-Mode to M-Mode, you must first select B/M-Mode and
then M-Mode.
3-8
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
46-030370 REV 0
Illustration 3-4
M-Mode Only Display
NOTE: The SCALE key does not function in M-Mode only.
3-3-12 Sweep Speed
High Sweep
Speed
Low
3-3-13 Multiple Image
Display
Multi Image
The SWEEP SPEED key is used to toggle between a high and low sweep
speed. The high sweep speed is two seconds per page; the low sweep
speed is four seconds per page. This sweep speed is applied to M-Mode
display formats.
Use the MULTI IMAGE LEFT and RIGHT ARROW keys to display dual BMode images.
To change from a single-image to multi-image when a linear probe is used,
press the RIGHT ARROW key. When a convex probe is used, press LEFT
ARROW key to move the single image to left, then press the RIGHT
ARROW key to freeze the left image and then activate the right image.
When the LEFT ARROW key is pressed, the right image of the CRT is frozen
and the left side image is shown in real-time. When the RIGHT ARROW key
is pressed, the left image is frozen and the right side image is shown in realtime. To freeze the last image, press the FREEZE key.
46-030370 REV 0
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
3-9
3-3-13 Multiple Image
Display
(continued)
To change from multi-image display to single image display, press the
ERASE key twice or B-MODE key once. (This operation is possible whether
the image is frozen or active.)
NOTE: It is possible for some probes to display a third image. To do
this press the RIGHT ARROW key twice.
The following table (Table 3-2) shows the maximum number of images that
can be displayed. The number depends on the probe type and the scale
factor selected. Use the MULTI IMAGE keys to display more than a single
image on the screen. Two examples of multiple image displays are shown
in Illustrations 3-5 and 3-6.
Table 3-2
Maximum Number of Images
Scale Factor
3-10
x0.7
x1
x1.5
x2
Probe A
Probe B
Probe C
Probe D
Probe E
Probe F
Probe G
Probe H
Probe R
Probe S
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
2
1
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
Probe CA
Probe CB
Probe CC
Probe CV
Probe LP
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
46-030370 REV 0
Illustration 3-5
Multiple Image Display
Convex CA
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 14 : 53
CA 5MHz
1.0
G63D54T60
G68D54T60
GE
Illustration 3-6
Multiple Image Display
Linear E
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 14 : 12
E 5MHz
0.7
G58D54T60
46-030370 REV 0
G60D54T60
G64D54T60
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
GE
3-11
3-3-14 Freeze Key
An image becomes frozen when the FREEZE key is pressed. The freeze
function is released when the key is pressed again.
Freeze
NOTE: Either ERASE, NEW PATIENT or B-MODE keys can also be
pressed to release freeze. Using these keys will erase patient
data, calculations and some scan parameters.
3-3-15 Body Pattern
Controls
Use the BODY PATTERN keys, ROTATION KNOB and TRACKBALL to
display body patterns, scan probe location and scan probe orientation.
Body Pattern
Rotation
L
R
Center
Sel
Press the L key to display the body pattern on the left side of a screen.
Use the L key when a single image display format is chosen.
Press the R key to display the body pattern on the right side of a screen.
(Multi-image format only).
Press the CENTER key to display the body pattern on the center of the
screen. (This key functions when three images are shown.)
NOTE: The probe mark can be moved when LED of either the L, R, or
CENTER keys is on.
The body pattern disappears if you press the L, R or CENTER
key whose LED is on.
Only the L key functions in B/M- and M-Modes.
The SEL key is used to select a body pattern from the package enabled. See
Illustrations on the following page.
To move and place the probe marker use the TRACKBALL.
Use the ROTATION KNOB to rotate the probe mark for orientation.
The rotation of the probe mark corresponds to that of the rotation knob.
The ROTATION KNOB stops every 30 degrees.
NOTE: The probe mark can be moved on the body pattern whose LED
is lighted.
3-12
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
46-030370 REV 0
3-3-15 Body Pattern
Controls
(continued)
One of three body pattern packages can be selected for display by pressing
the CONTROL, J keys.
Refer to Section 5-10, which explains Control Key Functions (CONTROL,
J), for further details.
PACKAGE A
Abdominal Patterns
PACKAGE B
OB, GYN Patterns
PACKAGE C
Liver and Head Patterns
46-030370 REV 0
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
3-13
3-3-16 Comment Key
The COMMENT key is used to add characters, words, and notations in the
scan image area.
Comment
A flashing cursor appears when the COMMENT key is pressed. The starting
point of the cursor can be controlled by the TRACKBALL.
Use the alphanumeric keys to enter comments.
Press the RETURN key to start a new line.
Use the BACKSPACE key for correction.
Press the ENTER key to release the comment function.
Comments will be erased if you press the comment key a second time, the
NEW PATIENT, ERASE or MODE SELECT keys (measurements will be
erased at the same time).
3-3-17 Keyboard
Illumination
Key
Light
The KEY LIGHT key illuminates the keyboard in a dark room.
Press this key to enable a soft green background illumination of the
keyboard to facilitate operation in a dark room.
Press this key a second time to disable the keyboard background
illumination.
3-3-18 Record Key
Record
3-3-19 Ext Video Key
Ext
Video
The RECORD key is used to permanently record the image on the display
monitor. It can be arranged to trigger a multi-image camera or video page
printer. This key is also used to transfer data to the DMC computer.
The EXT VIDEO key is used to view VCR playback video.
Press this key (LED light on) when playing a video tape on a VCR connected
to the RT 3200 Advantage - I.
Press this key a second time (LED light out) to view RT 3200 Advantage - I
images.
3-14
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
46-030370 REV 0
3-4 Measurement Keys
Measurement
Dist
Trace
Area
Set
DIST
The DIST key is used to enable the cursors to make generic
linear distance measurements. It is used in conjunction
with the TRACKBALL, SET and measure functions.
TRACE
AREA
The TRACE/AREA key is used to enable the trace function. It is used to trace an object to determine circumference and/or area of the object. Used in conjunction with the
TRACKBALL, SET and measure functions.
OFF
The OFF key is used to erase the measurement cursors,
trace and measured or calculated data.
SET
The SET key is used to fix a measurement cursor and
enable the second of the pair.
MEAS
The measure function is used to complete a measurement
sequence and display the results.
TRACKBALL
In this functional group, the TRACKBALL is used to
manipulate the measurement cursors.
ERASE
Press the ERASE key once and the system will give a
warning beep.
Off
Meas
Erase
Press this key a second time and the system will erase all
comments, measurements and calculations from the display screen. The image will also be unfrozen and return to
real-time scanning.
NOTE: Body Patterns will not be erased; they must be turned off with
the CONTROL, J function.
46-030370 REV 01
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
3-15
3-5 Function Keys
Function
OB
Tbl 1
OB
Tbl 2
Calc 1
Calc 2
Calc 3
Map
OB TBL 1
Displays the factory preset OB Table selections (BPD,
CRL, FL, AC and HC).
OB TBL 2
Displays the user programmable OB Table selection 1
through 5. 1 through 3 are for linear measurements and 4
and 5 are for area/circumference measurements.
CALC 1
Displays the calculation menu for circumference, volume,
heart rate, velocity and A/B Ratio.
CALC 2
Displays the calculation menu for Estimated Date of Confinement, Estimated Fetal Body Weight and Amniotic Fluid
Index.
CALC 3
This key is not functional for the RT 3200 Advantage - I.
MAP
Displays the menu to select the five available gray scale
mapping curves for the selected map package.
▼
▲
The CONTROL, N function toggles between MAP package
A and B.
These menu selection arrows allow the left/right movement
between the menu option available at the bottom of the
display.
3-6 Single Keystroke
Operation
Displaying the biopsy guidelines previously required the use of the CONTROL key function.
Whenever the system is not accepting alphanumeric input from the keyboard (i.e. Control function, Comment key function, ID/Name function,
CALC 1 or EDC modes), a single keystroke shall perform the following
function:
Keystroke
Function performed
L
Toggle biopsy guidelines on/off
L
3-16
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION
46-030370 REV 0
1
SECTION 4
GENERIC MEASUREMENTS
Overview
Distance Measurement
Circumference Measurement
Area Measurement
Measurement Calculation Error Messages
46-030370 REV 0
GENERIC MEASUREMENTS
4-1
This page intentionally left blank.
4-2
GENERIC MEASUREMENTS
46-030370 REV 0
SECTION 4
GENERIC MEASUREMENTS
4-1 Overview
Five measurement keys and the TRACKBALL are used to measure
distance, circumference and volume with four kinds of cursor calipers.
Only the distance measurement is available in B-, B/M- and M-Modes.
Illustration 4-1
Measurement Display
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 18 : 57
CH 5MHz
1.0
D+
46
X
48
X
41
X
45
G66D54T60
G66D54T60
GE
NOTE: Distance measurements are displayed in mm and area
measurements are displayed in square cm. These designations
are not displayed on the monitor.
All measurement data will be erased when MODE, SCALE, and PROBE are
changed. Only four measurements are possible for each type of measurement. If more than four measurements are attempted, the system stops
functioning and will beep.
If more than four measurements are necessary, press the OFF key to erase
the previous measurements.
46-030370 REV 0
GENERIC MEASUREMENTS
4-3
4-2 Distance Measurement
Press DIST, SET, MEAS, and use the TRACKBALL to measure the
distance between two locations.
▼
By using four cursor patterns, four distance measurements can be made on
one display.
Dist
▼
Press the DIST key. LED goes on and the "+" cursor is displayed.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor to the measurement starting point.
T. B.
▼
Press the SET key. The initial measurement point will be locked (set) and
the measurement end point cursor appears.
Set
▼
T. B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end point "+" cursor to the opposite end
of the measurement. (A dotted line with 10 mm interval connects two points
and measured value will appear on the left side of the CRT in mm.)
Press the MEAS key. The second cursor is locked and the measurement
values are displayed.
Meas
▼
Press the OFF key to erase the cursor, dotted line, and measured values.
Off
NOTE: If the DIST key is pressed in the middle of the measurement, the
cursor and measure values will be cleared (LED will go out). To
complete a measurement, repeat the preceding procedure.
By repeating the preceding procedure, up to four measurements
are possible on the same image.
4-4
GENERIC MEASUREMENTS
46-030370 REV 0
Illustration 4-2
Single Distance
Measurement
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 20 : 22
CA 5MHz
1.0
D+
61
X
X
X
G70D54T60
GE
Illustration 4-3
Multiple Distance
Measurements
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 21 : 17
CA 5MHz
1.0
D+
61
X
76
X
X
G70D54T60
46-030370 REV 0
GENERIC MEASUREMENTS
GE
4-5
4-3 Circumference
Measurement
To measure a circumference, use TRACE/AREA, SET, MEAS, and the
TRACKBALL.
▼
By using four cursor patterns, four circumference measurements can be
made on one display.
Trace
Area
Press the TRACE/AREA key. The LED goes on and the "+" is displayed.
▼
T. B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
▼
Set
▼
T. B.
Press the SET key. The starting point cursor is locked and the "+" cursor
changes to a dot cursor.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the dot cursor, tracing the object to be
measured. The trace is displayed as a continuous curve and the measured
value in mm is displayed on the left side of the screen.
▼
Meas
When the tracing is complete, press the MEAS key. The cursor is locked and
measured values are fixed.
Press the OFF key to erase the cursor, trace, and the measured values.
Off
NOTE: If the TRACE/AREA key is pressed in the middle of the
measurement, the cursor and measured values will be cleared
(LED will go out). To complete a measurement, repeat the
preceding procedure.
By repeating the preceding procedure, up to four measurements
for circumference and area are possible on the same screen.
4-6
GENERIC MEASUREMENTS
46-030370 REV 0
Illustration 4-4
Single Circumference
Measurement
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
12 : 05 : 58
CA 5MHz
1.0
C+
X
X
X
A+
X
X
X
139
G70D54T60
GE
Illustration 4-5
Multiple Circumference
Measurements
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
12 : 04 : 34
CH 5MHz
1.0
C+
X
X
X
A+
X
X
X
133
179
G70D54T60
46-030370 REV 0
G70D54T60
GENERIC MEASUREMENTS
GE
4-7
4-4 Area Measurement
Use TRACE/AREA, SET, MEAS and the TRACKBALL to mark area
measurements.
▼
By using the four different cursor patterns, four area measurements can be
made on one display.
Trace
Area
Press the TRACE/AREA key. The LED lights and the "+" cursor appear on
the display.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the first measurement point.
T. B.
▼
Set
▼
T. B.
▼
Set
▼
Press the SET key. The starting point "+" cursor is locked and changes to
a dot cursor.
Use the TRACKBALL and the dot cursor to trace the object to be measured.
The trace is displayed as a continuous curve, with the circumference
continuously updated as you move the TRACKBALL.
Press SET. The circumference measurement is locked. The "+" cursor
appears again.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor inside the traced area.
T. B.
▼
Meas
Press MEAS. The cursor is locked and area is measured by a graphical
method. The measured value is displayed in square cm.
Press OFF to erase all the display of the cursor, trace, and measured data.
Off
NOTE: If TRACE/AREA key is pressed in the middle of the
measurement, the cursor and measured values will be cleared
(LED will go out). To complete a measurement, repeat the
preceding procedure.
By repeating the preceding procedure, up to four measurements
for circumference and area are possible on the same screen.
4-8
GENERIC MEASUREMENTS
46-030370 REV 0
Illustration 4-6
Single Area Measurement
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
12 : 07 : 48
CA 5MHz
1.0
C+
X
X
X
A+
X
X
X
129
12.03
G70D54T60
GE
Illustration 4-7
Multiple Area Measurements
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
12 : 09 : 08
CH 5MHz
1.0
C+
X
X
X
A+
X
X
X
57
96
2.38
6.65
G70D54T60
46-030370 REV 0
G70D54T60
GENERIC MEASUREMENTS
GE
4-9
4-5 Measurement Calculation
Error Messages
Table 4-1
Measurement Calculation Error
Messages
Error Display
4-10
Error Explanation
ILG
Illegal:
Wrong Mode selected
(i.e. "VEL" in B-Mode)
N.M.
(No Msr.)
No Measure:
Calculation was attempted
before all measurement
steps were made.
ERR
Error:
The denominator was "0".
This method for area
measurement was wrong.
O.O.R.
Out of Range:
(Over Flow)
The calculation is out of
range. The measured value
is too large or too small.
N.A.
No Answer:
No result found in the
tables.
GENERIC MEASUREMENTS
46-030370 REV 0
SECTION 5
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
B-Mode Presetting
Clock Readjustment
Text/Graphics Display On/Off
Echo Level
Histogram
Film Development Time
Gestational Data
Hospital Name
Inverse
Body Pattern Package
High Frame Rate On/Off
Biopsy Guideline
Map Package
Dotted Line On/Off
Record Output (Gamma Curve Selection)
Frame Averaging On/Off
46-030370 REV 0
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-1
This page intentionally left blank.
5-2
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
SECTION 5
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
This section describes how to use the CONTROL key to perform the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
B-Mode parameter presets (CONTROL, B)
Set system date (CONTROL, C, D)
Set system time (CONTROL, C, T)
Text and graphics display on/off (CONTROL, D)
Echo level measurements—
fixed area (CONTROL, E, 1-2-3)
arbitrary area (CONTROL, E, 0)
Display an echo level histogram—
fixed area (CONTROL, E, H, 1-2-3)
arbitrary area (CONTROL, E, H, 0)
Film development time (CONTROL, F, 1-2-3-4)
Input user programmable GA tables
(CONTROL, G, 0)
Correct user programmable GA tables
(CONTROL, G, 1-2-3-4-5)
• Enter hospital name (CONTROL, H)
• Display or record inverse images
(CONTROL, I, 1-2-3-4)
• Select body pattern package
(CONTROL, J, 1-2-3)
• High frame rate on/off (CONTROL, K)
• Display biopsy guidelines (CONTROL, L, 1)
• Select gray scale map packages (CONTROL, N)
• Display dotted line between cursors
(CONTROL, Q)
• Select gamma curve for video output
(CONTROL, R, P-V)
• Enable/disable frame averaging (CONTROL, W)
Illustration 5-1
Control Function Key
Control
New
Patient
ID
Name
Comment
Erase
Ext
Video
Preset
1
Key
Light
Probe
2
Function
)
(
1
2
Q
E
W
A
S
Z
Shift
?
4
3
!
C
X
G
F
D
7
Y
T
R
=
"
6
5
U
H
B
V
Space
~
8
N
0
K
M
-
BS
P
O
I
J
%
+
9
L
.
Space
OB
Tbl 1
OB
Tbl 2
Calc 1
Calc 2
Return
/
Shift
Control
Enter
Map
Mode
Image Direction
Rvs
-
Body Pattern
Rotation
Inv
TGC
Measurement
L
R
Center
Sel
Dist
Set
Trace
Area
B
B/M
1
2
High Sweep
Speed
Low
M
Off
Focus
Meas
3
+
4
Comb
x1.5
10cm
x2.0
7.5cm
Scale
Depth
cm
0
Dynamic Range
x0.7
20cm
x1.0
15cm
2.5
Scroll
5
Record
7.5
10
Gain
12.5
Multi Image
15
Freeze
17.5
46-030370 REV 0
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-3
5-1 B-Mode Presetting
Control
B
CONTROL, B will allow you to preset scan parameters for each probe in Band B/M-Modes. When you press PRESET, NEW PATIENT, change the
PROBE or power on/off, the system will return to the preset state. Parameters that can be preset are:
•
GAIN
•
IMAGE INVERT
•
DYNAMIC RANGE
•
SCALE
•
FOCUS
•
MAP/WINDOW
•
IMAGE REVERSE
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
B
CONTROL : B___
B-MODE PRESETTING
Adjust the presets while scanning.
Gain, Dynamic Range, Mapping, Focus, Scale, Image Reverse and Image
Invert may be adjusted.
▼
CONTROL : ___
Enter
When the ENTER key is pressed, the values of Gain, Dynamic Range,
Focus, Scale, Map, Image Reverse and Image Invert will then be saved as
preset values. When the NEW PATIENT, PRESET and PROBE keys are
pressed or when the power switch is turned on, the system will be set to the
B-Mode preset values saved for the selected probe.
NOTE: This function is effective only for the probe type currently
selected
5-4
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
5-2 Clock Readjustment
Control
C
D
To set the DATE :
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
C
▼
D
▼
Enter
CONTROL : ___
CLOCK READJUSTMENT
CONTROL : CD
CLOCK READJUSTMENT / DATE (MM/DD/YY)
CONTROL : CD
CLOCK READJUSTMENT / DATE (MM/DD/YY)
Press ENTER to set the internal clock for month/day/year
▼
Input
Month/Day/Year
6 digits
▼
CONTROL : CD
CLOCK READJUSTMENT / DATE (MMDDYY) = 07/27/91
After pressing ENTER, use the numeric keys to input the date data.
CONTROL : ___
Enter
Data for the date is set when the ENTER key is pressed the second time.
NOTE: Slashes are required in the input string. If the date or month
is a single digit, it must include a zero to fill out the twocharacter field.
46-030370 REV 0
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-5
5-2 Clock Readjustment
(continued)
Control
C
T
To set the clock TIME :
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
C
▼
T
▼
Enter
CONTROL : C__
CLOCK READJUSTMENT
CONTROL : CT
CLOCK READJUSTMENT / TIME (HM)
CONTROL : CT
CLOCK READJUSTMENT / TIME (HM) =
Press ENTER to set the clock time (24 hour run)
▼
Hour/Min Input
4 digits
▼
Enter
5-6
CONTROL : CT
CLOCK READJUSTMENT : TIME (HM) = 1422
After pressing ENTER, use the numeric keys to input the time data.
CONTROL : ___
Time data is set when the ENTER key is pressed the second time.
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
5-3 Text/Graphics Display
On/Off
This CONTROL key causes the text/graphics display to be turned on/off on
the monitor, the image and gray scale pattern will remain.
Control
D
To turn the text/graphics display ON or OFF :
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
D
CONTROL : D___
GRAPHICS ON/OFF
▼
CONTROL : ___
Enter
This operation erases the display except for the image and gray scale
pattern. Text/graphics will not be erased until the ENTER key is pressed.
To turn on text/graphics display:
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
D
▼
CONTROL : D___
GRAPHICS ON/OFF
CONTROL : ___
Enter
If the text/graphics have been turned off, no screen display will be present
when the CONTROL and D keys are pressed.
Text/graphics will be displayed when the ENTER key is pressed.
46-030370 REV 0
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-7
5-4 Echo Level
5-4-1 Echo Level
Measurement
(fixed area)
(
Control
E
2
1
3
It is possible to measure echo level of a fixed area (box-shaped cursor).
This function is available only when the image is frozen. Measured values
are displayed near the cursor. The average gray level of the total pixels in
the cursor will be displayed in terms of a number ranging from 0 to 255. (See
Illustration 5-2). Echo level can be measured more than once in each image
display.
Selection of fixed area
1 = 3mm square 2 = 6mm square
3 = 12mm square
DISPLAY
CONTROL: ___
Control
▼
CONTROL : E1 ___
ECHO LEVEL
E
▼
(
1
2
▼
Enter
▼
T.B.
▼
Meas
3
CONTROL : E1
ECHO LEVEL /3mm
Press the ENTER key to lock the cursor. A box shaped cursor appears on
the screen. Move the cursor with the TRACKBALL.
For the case of E1, a 3mm x 3mm box appears, whose movement is
controlled by the TRACKBALL. Move the cursor to the area where measurement is needed.
Then, pressing MEAS the cursor is locked and the average echo level will
be displayed to the left of the cursor.
Press OFF to erase all echo level measurements
Off
NOTE: This function works only when the image is frozen.
5-8
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
5-4-2 Echo Level
Measurement
(arbitrary area)
+
Control
E
0
Echo amplitude level can be measured in an arbitrary area. (See Illustration
5-3).
DISPLAY
Control
▼
E
▼
+
0
▼
Enter
▼
CONTROL : ___
CONTROL : E ___
ECHO LEVEL
CONTROL : E0
ECHO LEVEL /FREE
CONTROL : E0
ECHO LEVEL/FREE
The "+" cursor appears.
“+” cursor is moved to the measurement starting point.
T.B.
▼
“+” cursor is changed into a dot cursor.
Set
▼
T.B.
Trace the circumference of the area with a dot cursor. The trace is displayed
by a curve made of a continuum of dots. The length of the circumference is
measured and the value is shown. The unit is in mm; however, mm does not
appear on the screen.
▼
NOTE: Make sure to complete the trace by connecting it to the starting
point.
Set
“+” cursor reappears.
▼
T.B.
▼
IMPORTANT: With the TRACKBALL, move the "+" cursor inside the traced
area.
Meas
Press the MEAS key to display the average echo level in the traced area The
measured value is displayed near the traced area. The circumference and
area are also measured.
Off
To erase the display, press the OFF key.
NOTE: This function works only when the image is frozen.
46-030370 REV 0
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-9
Illustration 5-2
Echo Level Measurement
(fixed area 5-4-1)
Illustration 5-3
Echo Level Measurement
(arbitrary area 5-4-2)
5-10
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
Illustration 5-4
Histogram
(fixed area 5-5-1)
Illustration 5-5
Histogram
(arbitrary area 5-5-2)
46-030370 REV 0
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-11
5-5 Histogram
5-5-1 Histogram (fixed
area)
(
Control
E
H
1
2
3
An echo distribution for a fixed area is displayed using a histogram. (See
Illustration 5-4).
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
CONTROL : E ___
ECHO LEVEL
E
▼
CONTROL : EH ___
ECHO LEVEL/HISTOGRAM
H
▼
(
1
2
▼
3
CONTROL : EH1
ECHO LEVEL/HISTOGRAM/3mm
For EHl, a 3mm x 3mm box cursor appears.
For EH2, a 6mm x 6mm box cursor appears.
For EH3, a 12mm x 12mm box cursor appears.
Press ENTER to lock in cursor choice.
Enter
▼
Move the cursor with the TRACKBALL to the area to be measured.
T.B.
▼
Meas
Press the MEAS and the cursor is locked and an echo histogram is
displayed.
The histogram is shown in the upper right of the image area.
The measured values will be displayed in the form of Mean (average gray
level inside the cursor: 0-255) and Mode (maximum gray level: 0-255 and
percentage: %).
Off
Press the OFF key to erase the display.
NOTE: This function works only when an image is frozen.
5-12
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
5-5-2 Histogram (an
arbitrary area)
+
Control
E
0
H
The echo distribution for an arbitrary area can be displayed as a histogram.
(See Illustration 5-5).
DISPLAY
CONTROL : E ___
Control
▼
E
CONTROL : E ___
ECHO LEVEL
▼
H
CONTROL : EH ___
ECHO LEVEL/HISTOGRAM
▼
+
0
CONTROL : EH0 ___
ECHO LEVEL/HISTOGRAM/FREE
▼
Enter
CONTROL : EH0 ___
ECHO LEVEL/HISTOGRAM/FREE
▼
T.B.
The "+" cursor appears on the screen. Move the cursor to the location where
measurement is needed using the TRACKBALL.
▼
Set
Press SET, the "+" cursor changes to a dot cursor.
▼
T.B.
Trace the circumference of the area with the dot cursor. The trace is
displayed by a curve made of continuous dots. The length of the circumference is measured and the value shown. The length is in mm, however, mm
does not appear on the screen.
NOTE: Be sure to complete the trace by connecting it to the starting
point.
▼
Set
Press SET and the "+" cursor reappears.
▼
(continued)
46-030370 REV 0
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-13
5-5-2 Histogram (an
arbitrary area)
(continued)
▼
T.B.
IMPORTANT: With the TRACKBALL move the "+" cursor inside the
traced area.
▼
Meas
Press MEAS, an echo level of the traced area is displayed in histogram. H
is shown near the area. Histogram is shown in the upper right of the image
area. Measured values will be displayed in the forms of Mean (average
number of the pixels of gray level inside the cursor: 0-255) and Mode
(maximum gray level: 0-255 and percentage.
Press the OFF key to erase the display.
Off
NOTE: This function works only when the image is frozen.
5-14
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
5-6 Film Development
Time
Sets an internal system audio beep alarm for Polaroid film development
timing.
(
Control
F
1
2
)
3
4
This is used to sound a two beep audio signal which indicates the completion
of the development of Polaroid film.
If more than one picture is recorded within a set-up time, only the first one
will be effectively timed.
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
F
CONTROL : F ___
DEVELOPMENT TIME
1
▼
CONTROL : F1 ___
DEVELOPMENT TIME : OFF
The alarm does not sound for the development time.
▼
CONTROL : F2 ___
DEVELOPMENT : 30 SEC
The alarm sounds 30 seconds after the RECORD key is pressed.
▼
CONTROL : F3 ___
DEVELOPMENT TIME : 45 SEC
The alarm sounds 45 seconds after the RECORD key is pressed.
▼
▼
CONTROL : F4 ___
DEVELOPMENT TIME : 60 SEC
The alarm sounds 60 seconds after the RECORD key is pressed.
2
(
3
)
4
▼
Enter
Press the ENTER key to set the Polaroid film development time alarm.
This setting will be saved and stored after the power is turned off.
NOTE: This function works only when CONTROL, R, P is selected.
46-030370 REV 0
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-15
5-7 Gestational Data
5-7-1 Programming
Gestational Age
Data
+
Control
G
0
This Control key function is used to allow user gestational age data to be
inputted into OB TBL 2.
The user may input up to 5 different tables for selection by OB TBL 2. Tables
1 through 3 correspond to distance measurements. Tables 4 and 5
correspond to circumference measurements.
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
CONTROL : G ___
GESTATIONAL DATA
G
▼
CONTROL : G0 ___
GESTATIONAL DATA/ INPUT
+
0
▼
CONTROL : G0
MENU LEVEL = ___
Press the ENTER key.
Enter
▼
1
2
1-5
(
3
)
?
4
5
CONTROL : G0
MENU LEVEL = 1/TITLE = ___
Select one of the five available user OB Tables in which you want to input
data.
NOTE: If error is made in MENU LEVEL, press BS (backspace) key to
erase your selection and re-enter the table number.
▼
Input Title
6 char. max.
▼
Return
▼
(continued)
5-16
CONTROL : G0
MENU LEVEL = 1/TITLE = BPD___
(BPD = BIPARIETAL DIAMETER:
Input the title (6 characters) of your menu selection.
CONTROL : G0
MENU LEVEL : 1/TITLE = BPD/
MIN. = ___mm
Press RETURN then enter the minimum measurement value (3 digits),
i.e. 20mm = 020mm.
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
5-7-1 Programming
Gestational Age
Data (continued)
▼
Input
Minimal
Value
CONTROL : G0
MENU LEVEL = 1/TITLE = BPD/MIN. = 020mm
▼
Return
CONTROL : G0
(01)020mm : __WD ± /MENU LEVEL = 1 (BPD)
At this stage, the list of measurements is shown on the monitor.
▼
Enter Weeks
CONTROL : G0
(01)020mm : 12W ___D ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the weeks as a 2 digit number.
▼
▼
Enter Days
CONTROL : G0
(01)020mm : 12W1D ± ___ /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the days as a 1 digit number.
▼
Enter standard
deviation:
weeks, days
or x
CONTROL : G0
(01)020mm : 12W1D ± 06 ___ /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the standard deviation as a 2 digit number. Enter "x" if no standard
deviation is needed.
▼
Return
CONTROL : G0
(02)021mm : ___ WD ± /MENULEVEL = 1(BPD)
Press RETURN. Repeat the above steps to enter the remaining values for
the weeks, days and standard deviation in the chart selected.
▼
Enter
CONTROL : ___
When all the menu entries are completed, press ENTER to store the table
in the system memory.
NOTE: When the 96th data entry is put in, the system beeps and
shows a "FILL!" annotation. If this happens, stop entering
data and press the ENTER key.
46-030370 REV 0
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-17
5-7-2 Editing
Gestational Age
Data
(
Control
G
1
2
)
3
?
4
5
To correct errors in user programmable tables.
Illustration 5-6
User Programmable OB Tables
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06/20/91
12 : 17 : 00
CA 5MHz
1.0
020mm : 12W1D:06 044mm:
068mm:
092mm:
021mm : 12W4D:06 045mm:
069mm:
093mm:
022mm : 12W3D:06 046mm:
070mm:
094mm:
023mm : 13W1D:06 047mm:
071mm:
095mm:
024mm : 13W2D:06 048mm:
072mm:
096mm:
025mm : 13W4D:06 049mm:
073mm:
097mm:
026mm : 13W6D:06 050mm:
074mm:
098mm:
027mm : 14W1D:06 051mm:
075mm:
099mm:
028mm : 14W4D:06 052mm:
076mm:
100mm:
029mm : 14W5D:06 053mm:
077mm:
101mm:
030mm : 15W0D:06 054mm:
078mm:
102mm:
031mm : 15W2D:06 055mm:
079mm:
103mm:
032mm : 15W4D:06 056mm:
080mm:
104mm:
033mm : 15W6D:06 057mm:
081mm:
105mm:
034mm : 16W1D:06 058mm:
082mm:
106mm:
035mm:
059mm:
083mm:
107mm:
036mm:
060mm:
084mm:
108mm:
037mm:
061mm:
085mm:
109mm:
038mm:
062mm:
086mm:
110mm:
039mm:
063mm:
087mm:
111mm:
040mm:
064mm:
088mm:
112mm:
041mm:
065mm:
089mm:
113mm:
042mm:
066mm:
090mm:
114mm:
043mm:
067mm:
091mm:
115mm:
G68D54T60
CONTROL : G1 (03) 022mm : 12W6D:06_/ MENU LEVEL = 1 (BPD
)
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
CONTROL : G ___
GESTATIONAL DATA/
G
▼
1
2
1-5
1-5
(
3
)
▼
Enter
▼
Enter the
distance
value to be
revised
?
4
5
CONTROL : G1 ___
GESTATIONAL DATA/LIST-EDITOR
Select the list from OB TBL 2 to be revised ( 1-5 ).
CONTROL : G1
_mm : WD ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Press the ENTER key. At this time the list will be displayed on the monitor.
CONTROL : G1
( ) 020mm : WD ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD).
Enter the measurement value you wish to revise.
▼
(continued)
5-18
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
5-7-2 Editing
Gestational Age
Data (continued)
▼
Return
CONTROL : G1
(02)021mm : ___ WD ±/MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Press RETURN. The measurement value you want to revise is highlighted
on the list.
▼
Enter Weeks
▼
Enter Days
▼
Enter standard
deviation,
weeks, days or x
▼
Return
CONTROL : G1
(02)011 mm : 12W ___D ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the new value for weeks. Data should be in 2 digits.
CONTROL : G1
(02)011mm : 12W4D ± ___ /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the new value for days as one digit. A value of 7 or less.
CONTROL : G1
(02)011mm : 12W4D ± 06 ___/MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the new value for standard deviation as two digits. "x" can be used if
no standard deviation is needed.
CONTROL : G1
( ) ___mm : W D ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
▼
Enter
46-030370 REV 0
CONTROL : ___
Press ENTER when all corrections have been completed.
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-19
5-8 Hospital Name
Control
H
Use the Control function to enter the name of the hospital and department.
They should be entered within two lines (8 characters maximum per line).
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
H
CONTROL : H ___
HOSPITAL NAME
▼
Enter
CONTROL : H ___
HOSPITAL NAME = ___
▼
Enter Hospital
Name
8 char/
2 lines
▼
Enter
CONTROL : H
HOSPITAL NAME = General/Electric
CONTROL : ___
Press ENTER to display and store the hospital name information.
The hospital name will be shown on the upper left corner of the screen.
This information will be retained even after the power is turned off.
5-20
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
5-9 Inverse
)
(
Control
I
1
2
3
4
This Control function selects the combination of white on black (W/B) or
black on white (B/W) formats that will be displayed on the monitor or
recorded by the peripherals when the RECORD key is pressed.
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
CONTROL : I ___
INVERSE:
I
▼
CONTROL : I 1
INVERSE : DISPLAY W/B RECORD W/B
Both display and record are positive.
▼
CONTROL : I 2 ___
INVERSE : DISPLAY W/B RECORD B/W
Display is negative and record is positive
▼
CONTROL : I 3 ___
INVERSE : DISPLAY B/W RECORD B/W
Both display and record are negative.
▼
▼
CONTROL : I 4 ___
INVERSE : DISPLAY B/W RECORD W/B
Display is negative and record is positive.
1
2
(
3
)
4
▼
CONTROL : ___
Enter
NOTE: When the RECORD key is pressed the display will momentarily
show the image that is being recorded. This setting is retained
even after power is turned off.
46-030370 REV 0
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-21
5-10 Body Pattern Package
(
Control
J
1
2
3
This Control function is used to select the body marker package that will be
displayed when using the BODY PATTERN keys.
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
J
▼
1
CONTROL : J ___
BODY PATTERN PACKAGE
CONTROL : J1 ___
BODY PATTERN PACKAGE/A
(Abdominal Patterns)
CONTROL : J2 ___
BODY PATTERN PACKAGE/B
(OB, GYN Patterns)
CONTROL : J3 ___
BODY PATTERN PACKAGE/C
(Liver and Head Patterns)
▼
2
▼
(
3
▼
Enter
5-22
CONTROL : ___
Press the ENTER key after selecting 1(A), 2(B) or 3(C).
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
Illustration 5-7
Body Marker Patterns
PACKAGE A
Abdominal Patterns
PACKAGE B
OB/GYN Patterns
PACKAGE C
Liver and Head Patterns
The body marker package selection will be retained after power is turned off.
46-030370 REV 0
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-23
5-11 High Frame Rate On/Off
Control
K
This Control function is used to enable or disable the "High Frame Rate"
option. The frame rate will double if "High Frame Rate" is turned ON.
DISPLAY
Control
CONTROL :
Press the CONTROL key
▼
K
CONTROL : K __
HIGH FRAME RATE ON
Press the "K" key to toggle the frame rate function.
▼
Enter
CONTROL :
Press ENTER to select your Control K function request
HFR
will be displayed in the lower left hand corner of the screen when
high frame rate is selected.
When HFR is selected the frame rate will become twice the usual rate.
Press CONTROL, K, ENTER again to toggle the High Frame Rate function
OFF.
NOTE: This function works only when a linear probe is being used.
5-24
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
5-12 Biopsy Guideline
Control
L
1
This Control function is used to display the biopsy guideline as a dotted line.
The type of guidelines varies depending on the probe type. This function
works only in B-Mode.
Press the OFF key under Measurement to erase the biopsy guideline
display.
Whenever the system is not accepting alphanumeric input from the keyboard (i.e. Control function, Comment key function, ID/Name function,
CALC 1 EDD or CALC 3 IVF modes), simply press L to turn on the Biopsy
Guidelines. Press L a second time to turn off the Biopsy Guidelines.
DISPLAY
Control
CONTROL : ___
▼
L
CONTROL : L ___
BIOPSY GUIDELINE
▼
1
CONTROL : L 1___
BIOPSY GUIDELINE
▼
Enter
3
46-030370 REV 02
Press the ENTER key and the guidelines appear.
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-25
5-12 Biopsy Guideline
(continued)
Probe
Type
Guideline Display
ATF/ATV Displays a single line along the needle path.
CA/CB*
For MAGGI™ (older style) guides:
Displays 3 lines simultaneously. They cross the center line
at 40mm, 60mm & 80mm, respectively.
For Ultra Pro™ (current style) guides (see note):
Two diverging dotted lines to define the path. The middle
of the path crosses the center line at a depth of 70 mm.
CK (CF)
Displays 3 dotted lines that represent the 3 angles available
from the stainless steel reuseable guide.
CTV*
26.5°
The line crosses the center line at 26 mm deep.
D
Biopsy zone
F
30°
R*
Displays a single line along needle path.
H**
Displays a single line along needle path.
LP
Two diverging dotted lines to define the path. The middle
of the path crosses the center line at a depth of 20 mm.
MZ
Displays a single line along needle path.
RA
Displays Needle Placement Grid.
Pressing CONTROL, L, 1 a second time removes the grid.
* Biopsy Guide attachment required.
** Biopsy Guide attachment is not available for H probe.
NOTE: The type of biopsy guideline displayed for the CA/CB probe is
service selectable by a switch (SW5) on the Master Controller
circuit board (MST board). Contact your GE service representative for the proper display.
5-26
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 02
3
Illustration 5-8
ATF/ATV Probe Biopsy Guideline
12 / 03 / 92
08 : 59 : 27
ATV 5MHz
x1.0
GE
G50D54T30
Illustration 5-9
CTV Probe Guideline
GE
Medical
04 / 15 / 91
10 : 59 : 45
CTV 5MHz
1.0
5.4mm
26.5°
26.5°
26mm
G46D66T50
CONTROL:__
2
46-030370 REV 0
1
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-27
Illustration 5-10
CA/CB Probe Guideline
Ultra Pro™ Guides
GE
Medical
06 / 09 / 93
10 : 59 : 45
CB3.5MHz
1.0
G46D54T60
Illustration 5-11
CA/CB Probe Guideline
MAGGI™ Guides
GE
Medical
04 / 15 / 91
10 : 59 : 45
CA 5MHz
1.0
5.4mm
40mm
60mm
80mm
G46D66T100
CONTROL:__
NOTE: The type of biopsy guideline displayed for the CA/CB probe is
service selectable by a switch (SW5) on the Master Controller
circuit board (MST board). Contact your GE service representative for the proper display.
5-28
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 01
5-12 Biopsy Guideline
(continued)
Illustration 5-12
D Probe Guideline
GE
Medical
04 / 15 / 91
10 : 59 : 45
D 3.5MHz
1.0
15°
G46D66T100
CONTROL:__
Illustration 5-13
F Probe Guideline
GE
Medical
04 / 15 / 91
10 : 59 : 45
F 5MHz
1.0
30°
30°
G46D66T100
CONTROL:__
46-030370 REV 0
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-29
5-12 Biopsy Guideline
(continued)
Illustration 5-14
H Probe Guideline
GE
Medical
12 / 10 / 92
11 : 14 : 12
H 7.5MHz
2.0
D+
x
x
x
C+
x
x
x
A+
x
x
x
ID:
1234
NAME:
SMITH
JOHN
G66D54T27
CONTROL:
GE
Illustration 5-15
LP Probe Guideline
GE
Medical
06 / 09 / 93
10 : 59 : 45
LP7.5MHz
1.5
G37D54T27
5-30
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
5-12 Biopsy Guideline
(continued)
Illustration 5-16
MZ Probe Guideline
Image Direction "RVS" is
Selected (on)
GE
Medical
06 / 20 / 92
12 : 28 : 59
MF6.5MHz
x1.0
D+
x
x
x
C+
x
x
x
A+
x
x
x
ID:
1234
NAME:
SMITH
JOHN
G46D66T50
GE
Probe Type is displayed as MF on screen (not MZ)
Illustration 5-17
R Probe Guideline
Image Direction "RVS" is
Selected (on)
GE
Medical
06 / 20 / 92
12 : 28 : 59
R 7MHz
x1.0
D+
x
x
x
C+
x
x
x
A+
x
x
x
ID:
1234
NAME:
SMITH
JOHN
46-030370 REV 023
GE
G46D66T50
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-31
5-12 Biopsy Guideline
(continued)
Illustration 5-18
RA Probe
Needle Placement Grid
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11/ 05 / 92
09 : 40 : 23
RA 7MHz
x2.0
+
+
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A
B
12
+
11
.
10
+
9
.
8
+
7
.
6
+
5
.
4
+
3
.
2
+
1
.
0
G35D48T40
+
+
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
C
D
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
+
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
E
F
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
+
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
G
H
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
+
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
J
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
+
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
K
L
M
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
GE
Illustration 5-19
CK Probe Guideline
GE
Medical
04 / 15 / 91
10 : 59 : 45
CF3.5MHz
1.0
G46D66T100
CONTROL:__
Probe Type is displayed as CF on screen, not CK.
5-32
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 2
0
3
5-13 Map Package
Control
N
This Control function is used to select the gray level mapping package menu
that will be displayed when the MAP key is pressed. The operator can
choose between Map Package A or B.
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
N
CONTROL : N ___
MAP PACKAGE B
▼
CONTROL : ___
Enter
NOTE: The system will toggle between map package A and map
package B each time CONTROL, N, ENTER is pressed.
5-14 Dotted Line On/Off
Control
Q
It is possible to erase the dotted line between two measurement cursors
when a distance measurement is taken.
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
Q
CONTROL : Q___
DOTTED LINE ON/OFF
▼
Press the ENTER key.
Enter
Each time CONTROL, Q, ENTER is pressed the dotted line displayed
between two cursors will toggle on/off or off/on
46-030370 REV 02
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-33
5-15 Record Output (Gamma
Curve Selection)
Control
R
P
V
This Control function will select if a gamma correction curve is used to modify
the output video when the RECORD key is pressed. CONTROL, R, P
selects a gamma curve for Polaroid imaging. CONTROL, R, V disables the
gamma correction curve for video printer recording.
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
CONTROL : R ___
RECORD OUTPUT
R
▼
V
▼
P
CONTROL : RP ___
RECORD OUTPUT/SELECT
POLAROID
(Gamma correction curve will be used when the RECORD key is pressed.
System beeps after record process has started.)
CONTROL : RV ___
RECORD OUTPUT/SELECT
VIDEO PRINTER
(Gamma correction curve will not be used when the RECORD key is
pressed. System beeps after record process has started.)
▼
Press the ENTER key.
Enter
* CONTROL, F will function when CONTROL, R, P is selected.
5-34
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 02
5-16 Frame Averaging On/Off
Control
W
This Control function will enable or disable the frame averaging function.
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
W
CONTROL : W
FRAME AVERAGING ON/OFF
▼
Press the ENTER key
Enter
Each time you press CONTROL, W, ENTER you will toggle the frame
averaging function on/off or off/on.
The image will appear grainy with a faster frame rate while frame averaging
is off.
The image will appear smoother with a slower frame rate while frame
averaging is on.
NOTE: A selection of frame averaging function will be performed on
the image (linear or convex) which is displayed on the screen
at the time of operation.
46-030370 REV 02
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
5-35
This page intentionally left blank.
5-36
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
46-030370 REV 02
SECTION 6
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
OB Table 1
OB Table 2
Calc 1
Calc 2
Mapping
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-1
This page intentionally left blank.
6-2
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
SECTION 6
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
Illustration 6-1
Function Key Selections
Function
New
Patient
ID
Name
Comment
OB
Tbl 1
OB
Tbl 2
Calc 1
Calc 2
Calc 3
Map
Erase
Ext
Video
Preset
Key
Light
1
2
Probe
Function
)
(
1
2
Q
Shift
E
W
A
S
Z
?
4
3
!
C
X
G
F
D
7
Y
T
R
=
"
6
5
V
Space
U
H
B
~
8
N
Space
0
K
M
-
L
.
BS
P
O
I
J
%
+
9
OB
Tbl 1
OB
Tbl 2
Calc 1
Calc 2
Return
/
Shift
Control
Enter
Map
Mode
Function Keys
There are 6 function keys (5 enabled, 1 disabled) and two arrow keys.
To display a function menu, press the desired function key.
The LED on that function key will light.
Arrow keys are used to select an item from each function menu display.
To cancel the function press the LIGHTED function key a second time.
Time Saver
If the proper measurement has already been made (i.e. distance, circumference or area) using generic measurements, immediately after making the
measurement, simply:
•
•
•
46-030370 REV 0
Select the proper function key to display that function's menu.
Use the ARROW key to select the desired calculation (i.e. BPD, CRL,
AC, etc.)
Press ENTER and the measurement will be recorded as the calculation
selected.
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-3
6-1 OB Tbl 1
6-1-1
BPD (Biparietal
Diameter)
Fetal age may be estimated by measuring the biparietal diameter.
Mid Line
Measure the maximum width of
the fetal head.
DISPLAY
OB
Tbl 1
1 BPD
2 CRL
3 FL
4 AC
5 HC
▼
If necessary, use the ARROW keys to select BPD.
1 BPD
2 CRL
3 FL
4 AC
5 HC
▼
Press the DIST key. The cursor "+" is displayed.
Dist
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
▼
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" cursor will appear.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite point of
the measurement.
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Meas
▼
Enter
Press the ENTER key. Gestation will be displayed on the left side of the
screen.
NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or
PROBE to erase the display. To erase the measurement result,
press the OFF key. To erase the Function Menu, press OB
TBL1 (LED will go out).
6-4
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
TABLE 6-1
BPD Factory Stored Table
Table 6-1 is the factory-stored
table of fetal age values for
BPDs from 20 to 100 mm.
BPD in mm
(User Input)
Gestational Age
(Displayed Output)
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
12W1D
12W4D
12W6D
13W1D
13W2D
13W4D
13W6D
14W1D
14W4D
14W5D
15W0D
15W2D
15W4D
15W6D
16W1D
16W4D
16W6D
17W1D
17W3D
17W5D
18W0D
18W2D
18W4D
18W6D
19W1D
19W4D
19W6D
20W1D
20W4D
20W6D
21W1D
21W4D
21W6D
22W1D
22W4D
22W6D
23W1D
23W2D
23W6D
24W1D
24W4D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±6D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±10D
±9D
±9D
BPD in mm
(User Input)
Gestational Age
(Displayed Output)
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
25W0D
25W2D
25W5D
26W1D
26W3D
26W6D
27W1D
27W4D
28W0D
28W2D
28W5D
29W1D
29W4D
29W6D
30W3D
30W6D
31W1D
31W4D
32W0D
32W4D
32W6D
33W2D
33W6D
34W1D
34W5D
35W1D
35W4D
36W1D
36W4D
37W0D
37W4D
38W0D
38W4D
38W6D
39W3D
39W6D
40W4D
41W0D
41W4D
42W0D
±9D
±9D
±9D
±9D
±9D
±9D
±9D
±9D
±9D
±9D
±9D
±9D
±9D
±9D
±14D
±14D
±14D
±14D
±14D
±14D
±14D
±14D
±14D
±14D
±14D
±14D
±14D
±25D
±25D
±25D
±25D
±25D
±25D
±25D
±25D
±25D
±25D
±25D
±25D
±25D
Source: Hadlock FP, J Ultrasound Med, 1:97-104 (April1982).
Measurements were taken from outer border to inner border of the skull wall.
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-5
6-1-2
CRL (Crown
Rump Length)
This is a method to estimate gestation by measuring crown rump length.
*Measure crown rump length.
DISPLAY
OB
Tbl 1
1 BPD
2 CRL
3 FL
4 AC
5 HC
▼
Use the ARROW keys to select CRL.
1 BPD
2 CRL
3 FL
4 AC
5 HC
▼
Dist
Press the DIST key. The cursor "+" is displayed.
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
▼
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" cursor will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite point of
the measurement.
▼
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Meas
▼
Enter
Press the ENTER key. Gestation will be displayed on the left side of the
screen.
NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or
PROBE to erase the display. To erase the measurement result,
press the OFF key. To erase the Function Menu, press OB
TBL 1 (LED will go out).
6-6
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
TABLE 6-2
CRL Factory Stored Tables
Table 6-2 is the factory stored
table of fetal age values for
CRLs from 6 to 78mm.
CRL in mm
(User Input)
Gestational Age
(Displayed Output)
CRL in mm
(User Input)
Gestational Age
(Displayed Output)
6mm
7
8
9
10
06W3D±5D
06W4D±5D
06W6D±6D
07W0D±5D
07W2D±6D
45mm
46
47
48
49
11W3D±5D
11W3D±6D
11W4D±5D
11W5D±5D
11W5D±6D
11
12
13
14
15
07W3D±5D
07W4D±5D
07W5D±5D
07W6D±5D
08W0D±5D
50
51
52
53
54
11W6D±5D
11W6D±6D
12W0D±5D
12W1D±5D
12W1D±6D
16
17
18
19
20
08W1D±5D
08W2D±6D
08W3D±6D
08W4D±5D
08W5D±5D
55
56
57
58
59
12W2D±5D
12W2D±6D
12W3D±5D
12W3D±6D
12W4D±5D
21
22
23
24
25
08W6D±5D
09W0D±5D
09W1D±5D
09W2D±5D
09W3D±6D
60
61
62
63
64
12W4D±6D
12W5D±6D
12W6D±5D
12W6D±6D
13W0D±5D
26
27
28
29
30
09W4D±5D
09W4D±6D
09W5D±5D
09W6D±5D
09W6D±6D
65
66
67
68
69
13W0D±6D
13W1D±5D
13W1D±6D
13W2D±5D
13W2D±6D
31
32
33
34
35
10W0D±6D
10W1D±5D
10W2D±5D
10W2D±6D
10W4D±5D
70
71
72
73
74
13W3D±5D
13W3D±6D
13W4D±5D
13W4D±6D
13W5D±5D
36
37
38
39
40
10W4D±5D
10W5D±5D
10W5D±6D
10W6D±5D
11W0D±5D
75
76
77
78
13W5D±6D
13W6D±5D
13W6D±6D
14W0D±5D
41
42
43
44
11W0D±6D
11W1D±5D
11W1D±6D
11W2D±6D
Source: Robinson HP, Fleming (10), revised by Yeh and Rabmowitz, Radiology,
Volume 166, Number 1, Pages 97-103, 1988
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-7
6-1-3
FL (Femur Length)
This is a method to estimate gestation by measuring the femur length.
*Measure femur length.
DISPLAY
OB
Tbl 1
1 BPD
2 CRL
3 FL
4 AC
5 HC
4 AC
5 HC
▼
Use the ARROW keys to select FL.
1 BPD
2 CRL
3 FL
▼
Press the DIST key. The cursor "+" is displayed.
Dist
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
▼
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" cursor will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite point of
the measurement.
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Meas
▼
Enter
Press the ENTER key. Gestation will be displayed on the left side of the
screen.
NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or
PROBE to erase the display. To erase the measurement result,
press the OFF key. To erase the Function Menu, press OB
TBL1 (LED will go out).
6-8
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
Table 6-3
FL Factory Stored Table
Table 6-3 is the factory-stored
table of fetal age values for FLs
from 10 to 79mm.
FL in mm
(User Input)
Gestational Age
(Displayed Output)
FL in mm
(User Input)
Gestational Age
(Displayed Output)
10mm
11
12
13
14
12W6D±06D
13W1D±06D
13W3D±06D
13W4D±06D
13W6D±06D
45mm
46
47
48
49
24W3D±10D
24W6D±10D
25W2D±10D
25W5D±10D
26W1D±10D
15mm
16
17
18
19
14W1D±06D
14W3D±06D
14W6D±06D
15W1D±06D
15W3D±06D
50mm
51
52
53
54
26W3D±10D
27W0D±10D
27W3D±10D
27W6D±10D
28W1D±10D
20mm
21
22
23
24
15W5D±06D
16W0D±06D
16W2D±06D
16W4D±06D
16W6D±06D
55mm
56
57
58
59
28W5D±10D
29W1D±10D
29W4D±10D
30W0D±10D
30W3D±10D
25mm
26
27
28
29
17W1D±06D
17W4D±06D
17W6D±06D
18W1D±06D
18W4D±06D
60mm
61
62
63
64
30W6D±10D
31W3D±10D
31W6D±10D
32W2D±10D
32W6D±10D
30mm
31
32
33
34
18W6D±06D
19W1D±06D
19W4D±06D
19W6D±06D
20W2D±06D
65mm
66
67
68
69
33W2D±10D
33W6D±10D
34W1D±10D
34W5D±10D
35W1D±10D
35mm
36
37
38
39
20W5D±06D
21W0D±06D
21W3D±06D
21W6D±06D
22W1D±06D
70mm
71
72
73
74
35W5D±10D
36W1D±11D
36W5D±11D
37W1D±11D
37W5D±11D
40mm
41
42
43
44
22W3D±06D
22W6D±06D
23W2D±06D
23W5D±06D
24W1D±10D
75mm
76
77
78
79
38W2D±11D
38W6D±11D
39W2D±11D
39W6D±11D
40W3D±11D
Source: Hadlock et al: AJR 138:877 (1982)
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-9
6-1-4
AC (Abdominal
Circumference)
This is a method to estimate gestational age by measuring the abdominal
circumference of the fetus. Circumference measurement can be obtained
by using the TRACE/AREA or two distance measurements.
DISPLAY
OB
Tbl 1
▼
1 BPD
2 CRL
3 FL
4 AC
5 HC
4 AC
5 HC
Use the ARROW keys to select AC.
1 BPD
2 CRL
3 FL
▼
Trace
Area
Press the TRACE/AREA key to trace the circumference. (Perform two
distance measurements and press ENTER for a two diameter method [see
Section 6-1-6]).
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
▼
Set
Press SET. The starting point cursor is locked and the "+" cursor changes
to a dot cursor.
▼
T.B.
Using the TRACKBALL, the dot cursor traces the object to be measured.
The trace is displayed as a continuous curve and the measured value in mm
is displayed on the left side of the screen.
▼
Press MEAS. The cursor is locked and measured values are fixed.
Meas
▼
Enter
Press the ENTER key. Gestation will be displayed on the left side of the
screen.
NOTE: If the TRACE/AREA key is pressed in the middle of the measurement, the cursor and measured values will be cleared
(LED will go out). To complete a measurement, repeat the
above procedure.
To erase the measurement results, press the OFF key. To
erase the Function Menu, press OB TBL1 (LED will go out).
6-10
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
Table 6-4
AC Factory Stored Table
Table 6-4 is the factory-stored
table of fetal age values for
ACs from 44 to 355mm.
AC in mm
(User Input)
Gestational Age
(Displayed Output)
AC in mm
(User Input)
Gestational Age
(Displayed Output)
44-49mm
50-56
57-63
12W0D±13D
12W3D±13D
13W0D±13D
228-232mm
233-237
238-243
27W0D±15D
27W3D±15D
28W0D±15D
64-70
71-76
77-83
13W3D±13D
14W0D±13D
14W3D±13D
244-248
249-253
254-258
28W3D±15D
29W0D±15D
29W3D±15D
84-89
90-96
97-102
15W0D±13D
15W3D±13D
16W0D±13D
259-263
264-268
269-273
30W0D±15D
30W3D±21D
31W0D±21D
103-109
110-115
116-122
16W3D±13D
17W0D±13D
17W3D±13D
274-278
279-283
284-288
31W3D±21D
32W0D±21D
32W3D±21D
123-128
129-134
135-140
18W0D±13D
18W3D±14D
19W0D±14D
289-293
294-297
298-302
33W0D±21D
33W3D±21D
34W0D±21D
141-147
148-153
154-159
19W3D±14D
20W0D±14D
20W3D±14D
303-307
308-311
312-316
34W3D±21D
35W0D±21D
35W3D±21D
160-165
166-171
172-176
21W0D±14D
21W3D±14D
22W0D±14D
317-320
321-325
326-329
36W0D±21D
36W3D±18D
37W0D±18D
177-182
183-188
189-194
22W3D±14D
23W0D±14D
23W3D±14D
330-334
335-338
339-342
37W3D±18D
38W0D±18D
38W3D±18D
195-199
200-205
206-210
24W0D±14D
24W3D±15D
25W0D±15D
342-346
347-350
351-355
39W0D±18D
40W3D±18D
40W0D±18D
211-216
217-221
222-227
25W3D±15D
26W0D±15D
26W3D±15D
Source: Hadlock, et al. RE: Am. J. Radiology 139:367-370, 1982.
Gestational age calculated from 50th percentile data.
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-11
6-1-5
HC (Head
Circumference)
A fetal age can be estimated by measuring the fetal head circumference.
Circumference measurement can be obtained by using the TRACE/AREA
or two distance measurements.
DISPLAY
OB
Tbl 1
1 BPD
2 CRL
3 FL
4 AC
5 HC
Use the ARROW keys to select HC.
1 BPD
2 CRL
3 FL
4 AC
5 HC
▼
▼
Trace
Area
Press the TRACE/AREA key. (Perform two distance measurements and
press ENTER for a two diameter method [see Section 6-1-6]).
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
▼
Set
Press SET. The starting point cursor is locked and the "+" cursor changes
to a dot cursor.
▼
T.B.
Using the TRACKBALL, the dot cursor traces the object to be measured.
The trace is displayed as a continuous curve and the measured value in mm
is displayed on the left side of the screen.
▼
Press MEAS. The cursor is locked and measured values are fixed.
Meas
▼
Enter
Press the ENTER key. Gestation will be displayed on the left side of the
screen.
NOTE: If the TRACE/AREA key is pressed in the middle of the measurement, the cursor and measured values will be cleared
(LED will go out). To complete a measurement, repeat the
above procedure.
To erase the measurement results, press the OFF key. To
erase the Function Menu, press OB TBL1 (LED will go out).
6-12
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
Table 6-5
HC Factory Stored Table
Table 6-5 is the factory-stored
table of fetal age values for
HCs from 67 to 354mm.
HC in mm
(User Input)
Gestational Age
(Display Output)
HC in mm
(User Input)
Gestational Age
(Display Output)
67-70mm
71-78
79-83
84-92
93-99
12W0D±9D
12W3D±9D
13W0D±9D
13W3D±9D
14W0D±9D
248-252mm
253-257
258-261
262-266
267-270
27W0D±16D
27W3D±16D
28W0D±16D
28W3D±16D
29W0D±16D
100-106
107-113
114-120
121-127
128-133
14W3D±9D
15W0D±9D
15W3D±9D
16W0D±9D
16W3D±9D
271-275
276-279
280-283
284-288
289-292
29W3D±16D
30W0D±16D
30W3D±19D
31W0D±19D
31W3D±19D
134-140
141-146
147-153
154-159
160-165
17W0D±9D
17W3D±9D
18W0D±9D
18W3D±11D
19W0D±11D
293-295
296-299
300-303
304-307
308-310
32W0D±19D
32W3D±19D
33W0D±19D
33W3D±19D
34W0D±19D
166-171
172-177
178-183
184-189
190-195
19W3D±11D
20W0D±11D
20W3D±11D
21W0D±11D
21W3D±11D
311-313
314-317
318-320
321-323
324-326
34W3D±19D
35W0D±19D
35W3D±19D
36W0D±19D
36W3D±24D
196-200
201-206
207-211
212-217
218-222
22W0D±11D
22W3D±11D
23W0D±11D
23W3D±11D
24W0D±11D
327-329
330-332
333-335
336-338
339-341
37W0D±24D
37W3D±24D
38W0D±24D
38W3D±24D
39W0D±24D
223-227
228-232
233-237
238-242
243-247
24W3D±16D
25W0D±16D
25W3D±16D
26W0D±16D
26W3D±16D
342-343
344-346
347-349
350-351
352-353
354
39W3D±24D
40W0D±24D
40W3D±24D
41W0D±24D
41W3D±24D
42W0D±24D
Source: Hadlock FP: Ultrasound in Obstetric and Gynecology 1:31, 1981.
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-13
6-1-6
AC/HC (Two
Diameter Method)
Freeze
To estimate gestational age from a two-diameter circumference calculation:
FREEZE the B-Mode image.
To measure the anterior-posterior diameter:
▼
Press the DIST key. The measurement cursor appears.
Dist
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to position the first cursor.
Press the SET key to fix the first cursor and enables the second cursor.
Set
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to position the second cursor.
▼
Meas
Press the MEAS key to fix the second cursor and record the anteriorposterior diameter.
▼
Press the DIST key. The measurement cursor appears.
Dist
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to position the first cursor.
Press the SET key to fix the first cursor and enables the second cursor.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to position the second cursor.
Press the MEAS key to fix the second cursor and record the lateral diameter.
Meas
▼
(continued)
6-14
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-1-6
AC/HC (Two
Diameter Method)
(continued)
▼
OB
Tbl 1
or
OB
Tbl 2
Press the OB TBL 1 (Factory Preset Table) or OB TBL 2 (User Programmable Table) key.
DISPLAY
TBL 1
▼
1 BPD
2 CRL
3 FL
4 AC
5 HC
Use the Function LEFT/RIGHT ARROW keys to select HC (Head Circumference) or AC (Abdominal Circumference).
▼
Press the ENTER key.
Enter
The system computes the gestational age from the calculated circumference, then stores circumference and diameters for display on the report
page.
6-2 OB Tbl 2
Up to five user programmable tables can be put into OB TBL 2 by using the
CONTROL, G, 0 function.
NOTE: The title must be no larger than six letters.
Input has to be in 3 digits. The number of weeks has to be
between 0 and 63.
The number of days must be between 0 and 6.
The standard deviation (days, weeks) can be 0-15 days, 0-9
weeks, or x.
Up to 96 data fields can be entered per table. It is recommended that the worksheet on OB TBL 2 be copied and filled
out prior to entering the table data into the system.
NOTE: Menu levels 1 through 3 are for single distance measurements.
Menu levels 4 and 5 are for circumference.
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-15
6-2-1
Programming
Gestational Age
Data
+
Control
G
0
This Control key function is used to allow user gestational age data to be
inputted into OB TBL 2.
The user may input up to five different tables for selection by OB TBL 2.
Tables 1 through 3 correspond to distance measurements. Tables 4 and 5
correspond to circumference measurements.
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
CONTROL : G ___
GESTATIONAL DATA
G
▼
+
CONTROL : G0 ___
GESTATIONAL DATA/ INPUT
0
▼
Press the ENTER key.
Enter
▼
(
1
2
)
3
?
4
5
CONTROL : G0
MENU LEVEL = 1/TITLE = ___
Select one of the five available user OB Tables in which you want to input
data.
NOTE: If an error is made in MENU LEVEL, press BS (backspace)
key to erase your selection and re-enter the table number.
▼
Input Title
6 char. max.
CONTROL : G0
MENU LEVEL = 1/TITLE = BPD___
BPD = BIPARIETAL DIAMETER:
Input the title (6 characters) of your menu selection.
▼
Return
▼
CONTROL : G0
MENU LEVEL : 1/TITLE = BPD/
MIN. = ___mm
Press RETURN then enter the minimum measurement value (3 digits),
i.e. 20mm = 020mm.
(continued)
6-16
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-2-1
Programming
Gestational Age
Data (continued)
▼
Input
Minimal
Value
CONTROL : G0
MENU LEVEL = 1/TITLE = BPD/MIN. = 020mm
NOTE: When setting the minimal value, the recommendation is to set
it smaller than the minimal value in the gestation table.
▼
Return
▼
▼
Enter Weeks
CONTROL : G0
(01)020mm : __WO ± /MENU LEVEL = 1 (BPD)
At this stage, the list of measurements is shown on the monitor.
CONTROL : G0
(01)020mm : 12W ___D ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the weeks as a 2 digit number.
▼
Enter Days
▼
Enter standard
deviation,
weeks, days
or x
▼
Return
CONTROL : G0
(01)020mm : 12W1D ± ___ /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the days as a 1 digit number.
CONTROL : G0
(01)020mm : 12W1D ± 06 ___ /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the standard deviation as a 2 digit number. Enter "x" if no standard
deviation is needed.
CONTROL : G0
(02)021mm : ___ WD ± /MENULEVEL = 1(BPD)
Press RETURN. Repeat the above steps to enter the remaining values for
the weeks, days and standard deviation in the chart selected.
▼
Enter
CONTROL : ___
When all the menu entries are completed, press ENTER to store the table
in the system memory.
NOTE: When the 96th data entry is put in, the system beeps and
shows a FILL annotation. If this happens, stop entering data
and press the ENTER key.
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-17
6-2-2
Editing
Gestational Age
Data
(
Control
G
1
2
)
3
?
4
5
To correct errors in user programmable tables.
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
CONTROL : G ___
GESTATIONAL DATA
G
▼
(
1
2
)
3
?
4
5
CONTROL : G1 ___
GESTATIONAL DATA/LIST-EDITOR
Select the list from OB TBL 2 to be revised.
▼
Enter
▼
Enter the
distance
value to be
revised
CONTROL : G1
_mm : WD ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Press the ENTER key. At this time the list will be displayed on the monitor.
CONTROL : G1
( ) 020mm : WD ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD).
Enter the measurement value you wish to revise.
▼
(continued)
6-18
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-2-2
Editing
Gestational Age
Data (continued)
▼
Return
▼
▼
Enter Weeks
▼
Enter Days
▼
Enter standard
deviation,
weeks, days
or x
CONTROL : G1
(02)021mm : ___ WD ±/MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Press RETURN. The measurement value you want to revise is highlighted
on the list.
CONTROL : G1
(02)021 mm : 12W ___D ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the new value for weeks. Data should be in 2 digits.
CONTROL : G1
(02)021mm : 12W1D ± ___ /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the new value for days as one digit. A value of 7 or less.
CONTROL : G1
(02)021mm : 12W D ± 06 ___/MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the new value for standard deviation as two digits. "x" can be used if
no standard deviation is needed.
▼
Return
CONTROL : G1
( ) ___mm : W D ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
▼
Enter
CONTROL : ___
Press ENTER when all corrections have been completed.
Tables 6-6 and 6-7 can be used as a coding worksheet for programming your
personal OB Tables.
Duplicate this worksheet if you intend to program more than two tables.
Keep a written record of your personal tables in this operator manual.
REMEMBER: Tables 1, 2 and 3 are set up as distance measurement
tables. Tables 4 and 5 are set up as circumference
tables.
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-19
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
MENU LEVEL = __
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
1
Table 6-6
Coding Sheet
6-20
46-030370 REV 0
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
TITLE = __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-21
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
MENU LEVEL = __
Table 6-7
Coding Sheet
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
TITLE = __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
6-3 Calc 1
Five types of calculations are available.
Circumference (mm)
Circumference is calculated by using the formula
to approximate an ellipse circumference. It is
necessary to make two distance measurements.
Volume (cm3)
Volume is calculated by a formula corresponding
to the number of measurements made. Volumes
can be calculated using one, two or three measurements.
Heart Rate (per minute)
Heart rate per minute is calculated by measuring
the interval between two beats in M-Mode.
Velocity (mm/s)
Velocity is calculated by using the amplitude
measured in M-Mode.
A/B (ratio)
Ratio is calculated by comparing two distance
measurements.
NOTE: When you repeat any of the above CALC 1 calculations, you
must press the OFF key first to clear the calculation register.
Failure to do so will cause the second calculation to use the
first set of measurements.
6-22
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
The circumference can be computed by using a formula for ellipse; with this
method two distance measurements are needed to determine the circumference (unit: mm). As many as four circumference calculations can be
displayed.
Measure the minor axis (a) and
the major axis (b).
b
6-3-1 Circumference
a
DISPLAY
1 CIRC
2 VOL
3 HR
4 VELO
5 A/B A+Bx
Calc 1
If necessary, use the ARROW keys to select circumference (CIRC)
1 CIRC
2 VOL
3 HR
4 VELO 5 A/B A+Bx
▼
▼
▼
Dist
▼
T.B.
Press the DIST key. The cursor "+" ("x") is displayed. (The second cursor
is an "x" cursor).
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" ("x") cursor to the measurement
starting point.
▼
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" ("x") cursor will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite point of
the measurement.
Meas
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Repeat the distance
measurement steps a second time for distance b. (See the diagram above.)
Enter
After the two distance measurements have been made, press ENTER.
Circumference will be displayed on the left side of the screen.
NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE or
PROBE to erase all measurement results. To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1. (LED will go out.)
See the following page for the procedure to calculate additional circumference measurements.
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-23
6-3-1 Circumference
(continued)
Press the OFF key. The distance measurements and cursors will be erased.
The circumference calculation(s) will remain.
▼
Off
The following steps can be repeated to display as many as four circumference calculations. To check your work or measure another part of the image,
follow the procedure below to calculate an additional circumference measurement.
▼
Dist
Press the DIST key. The "+" ("x") cursor will be displayed. (The second
cursor is an "x" cursor.)
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" ("x") cursor to the measurement
starting point.
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" ("x") cursor will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite point of
the measurement.
Meas
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Repeat the distance
measurements steps a second time for distance b. (See the diagram on the
previous page).
Enter
After the two distance measurements have been made, press ENTER. The
additional circumference measurement will be displayed on the screen.
NOTE: These steps can be repeated to display as many as four
circumference calculations. The most recent calculation displays below the other results.
Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or
PROBE to erase all measurement calculations.
To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).
6-24
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-3-2 Volume
The volume calculation selected from CALC 1 can be made by a one, two
or three diameter method.
One Measurement
If only one measurement is made before the ENTER
key is pressed, the measurement will be displayed
and a volume computed for a sphere of that diameter. If the system is unfrozen, this measurement will
be lost.
Two Measurement
If only two measurements are made before the
ENTER key is pressed, the measurements will be
displayed and a volume computed for a spheroid
having those two diameters and a third diameter
equal to the mean of the two diameters measured. If
the system is unfrozen, the two measurements will
be lost.
Three Measurements Three measurements are easily taken in the dual
B-Mode (split screen) display format. If three measurements are made before the ENTER key is
pressed, the measurements will be displayed and a
volume computed for a spheroid of those three
diameters. If the system is unfrozen, the three
measurements will be lost.
Four Measurements If four measurements are made before the ENTER
key is pressed (not normally done but possible with
the RT 3200 Advantage - I), the last diameter is
ignored and the system operates as for three diameters, using the first three measurements. If the
system is unfrozen, all measurements will be lost.
NOTE: If the three diameter method is used, the multi-image function
may be used in order to avoid losing data when the system is
unfrozen to scan the second view.
The following details the three diameter method for volume measurement
and calculations using the dual B-Mode format. It is followed by a method
that can be used with the full screen format.
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-25
6-3-2 Volume
(continued)
Three Diameter Method in
Split Screen Mode
b
Volume is calculated by using an approximate method for an ellipsoid. It is
necessary to make three measurements on two screens to calculate volume
(unit: cm3). As many as four volume calculations can be displayed.
a
c
The formula used to calculate volume is: Vcm3 = .523 x (a • b • c)
In order to calculate volume, follow the procedure below.
Multi Image
Press the MULTI-IMAGE LEFT ARROW key. Scan the object in either a
sagittal or axial plane.
▼
Freeze
Press FREEZE to freeze the left image.
▼
Multi Image
Press the MULTI-IMAGE RIGHT ARROW key to activate the right image.
Scan the object in the appropriate scan plane.
▼
Freeze
Press FREEZE to freeze the right image.
▼
(continued)
6-26
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-3-2 Volume
Three Diameter Method in
Split Screen Mode
(continued)
DISPLAY
▼
1 CIRC
2 VOL
3 HR
4 VELO
5 A/B A+Bx
Calc 1
▼
▼
Use the ARROW keys to select volume (VOL)
1 CIRC
2 VOL
3 HR
4 VELO 5 A/B A+BxC*
▼
Dist
Press the DIST key. The "+" ("x", "x") cursor is displayed. ("x" is the second
cursor, "x" is the third cursor)
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor ("x", "x") to the measurement
starting point.
▼
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+", ("x", "x") will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the end of the
measurement.
▼
Meas
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Repeat the distance
measurement steps a second time for distance b and a third time for distance
c. (See the diagram on the previous page for distance b and c.)
Enter
When all three distance measurements have been made, press ENTER.
The volume will be displayed on the left side of the screen in cubic cm.
NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or
PROBE to erase all measurement results.
To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).
See the following page for the procedure to calculate additional volume
measurements.
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-27
6-3-2 Volume
Three Diameter Method in
Split Screen Mode
(continued)
Press the OFF key. The distance measurements and cursors will be erased.
The volume calculation(s) will remain.
▼
Off
The following steps can be repeated to display as many as four volume
calculations. If you want to check your work or measure another part of the
image, follow the procedure below to calculate an additional volume measurement.
▼
Dist
Press the DIST key. The "+" ("x", "x") cursor is displayed. ("x" is the second
cursor, "x" is the third cursor)
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor ("x", "x") to the measurement
starting point.
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+", ("x", "x") will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the end of the
measurement.
▼
Meas
Enter
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Repeat the distance
measurement steps a second time for distance b and a third time for distance
c. (See the diagram on the previous page for distances b and c.)
When all three distance measurements have been made, press ENTER.
The volume will be displayed on the left side of the screen in cubic cm.
NOTE: These steps can be repeated to display as many as four volume
calculations. The most recent calculation is displayed below
the other results.
Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or
PROBE to erase all measurement results.
To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).
6-28
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-3-2 Volume
(continued)
If the dual B-Mode (split screen) display format is not used, the three
measurements can still be employed. To use the three measurement
method with the full screen display format, perform the following steps:
Three Diameter Method in
Full Screen Mode
First Measurement
Freeze
▼
Scan the patient in the sagittal plane to obtain the necessary image with the
proper orientation. Freeze the image.
Press the DIST key. The "+" cursor is displayed.
Dist
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+" will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Meas
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite end of
the measurement.
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. If this is the only
distance to be measured, press ENTER.
NOTE: Write down the first measurement. When unfreezing the
image, this measurement will be lost.
▼
Unfreeze the image and scan in the axial plane.
Freeze
▼
Freeze the desired image.
Freeze
▼
(continued)
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-29
6-3-2 Volume
Three Diameter Method in
Full Screen Mode
First Measurement
(continued)
▼
Dist
Since it is necessary to have all measurements on the screen before
pressing ENTER, press DIST to make a simulated (dummy) first measurement at the top of the screen or outside of the image area.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor outside the image area.
T.B.
▼
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" cursor will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor so that the measurement is the same as was recorded in the sagittal plane. See Illustration 6-2.
Press MEAS. This previously recorded measurement must be entered first.
Meas
Illustration 6-2
Simulated First Measurement
+--------+
First Measurement
6-30
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-3-2 Volume
(continued)
Now measure the second and third measurements on the frozen image.
Three Diameter Method in
Full Screen Mode
Second Measurement
Press the DIST key. The "x" cursor is displayed.
Dist
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "x" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "x" will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite end of
the measurement.
Meas
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. If this is the last distance
to be measured, press ENTER.
Enter
Do NOT press ENTER if you wish to make a third measurement. Proceed
with the third diameter.
Illustration 6-3
Three Diameter Method—Full
Screen Mode
+--------+
x
x
First Measurement
Second Measurement
x
x
Third Measurement
46-030370 REV 02
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-31
6-3-2 Volume
(continued)
Three Diameter Method in
Full Screen Mode
Third Measurement
Press the DIST key. The "x" cursor is displayed.
Dist
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "x" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "x" will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite end of
the measurement.
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Meas
When all measurements have been taken, press the ENTER key.
Enter
The volume will be displayed on the left side of the screen in cubic cm.
6-32
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 02
6-3-3 Heart Rate
Heart rate in beats per minute is calculated by measuring the interval
between two heart beats (unit: beats/minute). This measurement must be
done on an M-Mode display. As many as four heart rate calculations can be
displayed.
Measure the distance between
two heart beats in M-Mode.
HR = 60x2/lapsed time.
DISPLAY (B/M-Mode or M-Mode)
Calc 1
1 CIRC
2 VOL
3 HR
4 VELO
5 A/B A+Bx
▼
Use the ARROW keys to select heart rate (HR)
1 CIRC
2 VOL
3 HR
4 VELO 5 A/B TIME +
▼
Press the DIST key. The "+" cursor is displayed.
Dist
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+" will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the end of the
measurement.
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Meas
Enter
Press ENTER. The heart rate will be displayed on the left side of the screen
in beats per minute.
NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or
PROBE to erase all measurement results. To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out.)
See the following page for the procedure to calculate additional heart rate
measurements.
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-33
6-3-3 Heart Rate
(continued)
The following steps can be repeated to display as many as four heart rate
calculations. If you want to check your work or measure another part of the
image, follow the procedure below to calculate additional heart rate measurement.
Off
▼
Press the OFF key. The distance measurement and cursors will be erased.
The Heart rate calculation will remain.
Press the DIST key. The "+" cursor is displayed.
Dist
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+" will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the end of the
measurement.
▼
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Meas
Enter
Press ENTER. The heart rate will be displayed on the left side of the screen
in beats per minute.
NOTE: The distance measurement on the M-Mode image is actually
the horizontal difference between the two cursors.
Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or
PROBE to erase all measurement results.
To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).
6-34
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-3-4 Velocity
Velocity is calculated by measuring an amplitude in the M-Mode portion of
the display only. The velocity will be displayed as mm/second. As many as
four velocity calculations can be displayed.
Measure the distance
of a bright line in MMode. (B/M- and MModes) VELO = height
of a wave/elapsed time
X
X
DISPLAY
1 CIRC
2 VOL
3 HR
4 VELO
5 A/B A+Bx
Calc 1
▼
Use the ARROW keys to select velocity (VELO).
1 CIRC
2 VOL
3 HR
4 VELO 5 A/B VELO+Display
(B/M-Mode or MMode)
▼
Dist
Press the DIST key. The "+" cursor is displayed.
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
▼
Set
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+" will appear.
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the end of the
measurement.
▼
Meas
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Enter
Press ENTER. The velocity will be displayed on the left side of the screen
in mm/s (millimeters per second).
NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE or
PROBE to erase all measurement results.
To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-35
6-3-4 Velocity
(continued)
Off
▼
The following steps can be repeated to display as many as four velocity
calculations. To check your work or measure another part of the image,
follow the procedure below to calculate an additional velocity measurement.
Press the OFF key. The distance measurement and cursors will be erased.
The velocity calculation will remain.
Press the DIST key. The "+" cursor is displayed.
Dist
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
▼
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+" will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the end of the
measurement.
▼
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Meas
Enter
Press ENTER. The velocity will be displayed on the left side of the screen
in mm/second.
NOTE: The distance measurement on the M-Mode image is actually
the vertical difference between the two cursors.
Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or
PROBE to erase all measurement results.
To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).
6-36
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-3-5 A/B (Calculation
of Ratio)
This measurement is used to calculate a ratio of two measured distances.
▲
R = first distance (+)/Second distance (x)
A
▲
B
Example: To obtain an FL/BPD ratio...
▲
+
x
+
Measures FL with "+" cursors.
Measure BPD with "x" cursors.
▲
x
DISPLAY
1 CIRC
2 VOL
3 HR
4 VELO
5 A/B A+Bx
▼
Calc 1
▼
▼
Dist
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the ARROW keys to select A/B* ratio (A/B)
1 CIRC
2 VOL
3 HR
4 VELO 5 A/B A+Bx
* A is the "+" cursor and B is the "x" cursor.
Press the DIST key. The cursor "+" ("x") is displayed. (The second cursor
is an "x" cursor).
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" ("x") cursor to the measurement
starting point.
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" ("x") cursor will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite point of
the measurement.
Meas
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Repeat the distance
measurement steps a second time for the "x" cursor (B). (See the diagram
above.)
Enter
After the two distance measurements have been made, press ENTER. A/B
ratio will be displayed on the left side of the screen.
NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE or
PROBE to erase all measurement results.
To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1. (LED will go out.)
See the following page for the procedure to calculate additional A/B ratio
measurements.
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-37
6-3-5 A/B (Calculation
of Ratio)
(continued)
Press the OFF key. The distance measurements and cursors will be erased.
The A/B ratio calculation will remain.
▼
Off
The following steps can be repeated to display as many as four A/B ratio
calculations. To check your work or measure another part of the image,
follow the procedure below to calculate an additional A/B ratio of two
measured distances.
▼
Dist
▼
T.B.
Press the DIST key. The cursor "+" ("x") is displayed. (The second cursor
is an "x" cursor).
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" ("x") cursor to the measurement
starting point.
▼
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" ("x") cursor will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite point of
the measurement.
Meas
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Repeat the distance
measurement steps a second time for the "x" cursor (B). (See the diagram
on the previous page.)
Enter
After the two distance measurements have been made, press ENTER.
A/B ratio will be displayed on the left side of the screen.
NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE or
PROBE to erase all measurement results.
To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).
6-38
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-4 Calc 2
46-030370 REV 0
Four types of calculations are available.
Estimated Date of Confinement
Calculate a due date based on estimated gestation.
Estimated Fetal Body Weight
Calculate the fetal body weight based
on either the Shepard/Richards/
Berkowitz model (BPD/AC) or the
Hadlock model (FL/AC).
Stepper Volume (STVOL)
A method for measuring volumes is provided for use with an axial probe and
mechanical stepper assembly. The
mechanical stepper moves the probe by
a fixed increment.
Amniotic Fluid Index
Calculate the amniotic fluid index by
taking the distance measurement of the
amniotic fluid depth in each of the four
axial quadrants of the uterine cavity.
The four measurements are calculated
together to formulate the amniotic fluid
index (AFI).
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-39
6-4-1 Estimated Date of
Confinement
This is a method to calculate an estimated date of confinement by using an
estimated gestation.
EDC = 280 - Estimated gestation + examination date
Enter gestational age by using the alphanumeric keys.
DISPLAY
1
Calc 2
▼
EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4 AFI
(displayed on the lower right of the screen.)
If necessary, use the ARROW keys to select EDC.
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4 AFI
▼
Enter Weeks
using A/N
key
Enter the number of weeks in 2 digits.
▼
Enter Days
using A/N
key
▼
Enter
Enter the number of days (0-7).
Press ENTER.
Estimated date of confinement will be shown on the left side of the screen
as Month/Day/Year.
NOTE: To erase measurement result, press ERASE twice, SCALE,
NEW PATIENT, or PROBE.
To erase Function Menu, press CALC 2 (LED will go out).
6-40
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-4-2 Estimated Fetal
Body Weight
When EFBW is selected from the CALC 2 function, EFBW calculations will
be displayed for two possible fetal body weights. The EFBW's will be labeled
#1 and #2.
Three lines will appear in the text scroll area on the left side of the display.
It will be formatted as shown below.
EFBW:
#1
#2
9999
9999
To display estimated fetal body weight:
DISPLAY
Calc 2
1
EDC
2 EFBW
3
STVOL
4
AFI
Use the ARROW keys to select "EFBW".
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4
AFI
▼
▼
Enter
Press ENTER. EFBW calculations will be displayed on the lower left portion
of the display.
#1 Estimated Fetal
Body Weight
(BPD/AC)
The Estimated Fetal Body Weight #1 (EFBW) is computed using a Shephard/
Richards/Berkowitz model. "An evaluation of two equations for predicting
weight by ultrasound." (Shephard et al., Am. J. Obstet. Gynecol., 142:47-54,
1982)
EFBW is determined according to the equation:
LOG 10
(EFBW)
0.00002646*AC*BPD
= 3-1.7492 + 0.0166*BPD + 0.0046*AC -
The above formula yields EFBW in grams when the AC and BPD are in
millimeters. (The machine automatically takes the conversion from kilograms to grams and millimeters to centimeters.) (For OB TBL1 only.)
When EFBW is selected, this calculation is made only if AC and BPD
measurements have already been made. Otherwise, the EFBW #1 field to
the left on the screen will display O.F. or U.F.
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-41
6-4-2 Estimated Fetal
Body Weight
(continued)
#2 Estimated Fetal
Body Weight
(FL/AC)
The Estimated Fetal Body Weight #2 (EFBW) is computed using the
Hadlock model. (Hadlock, F.P., et al,: "Sonographic Estimation of Fetal
Weight", Radiology, 150:535-40, 1984.)
EFBW is determined according to the equation:
LOG10 (EFBW) = 1.3598 + 0.01844*FL + 0.0051*AC - 0.000037*AC*FL
The above formula yields EFBW in grams when the AC and FL are in
millimeters. (The machine automatically makes the conversion from kilograms to grams and millimeters to centimeters.) (For OB TBL1 only.)
When EFBW is selected, this calculation is made only if AC and FL
measurements have already been made. Otherwise, the EFBW #2 field to
the left on the screen will display U.F.
6-42
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-4-3 Stepper Volume
Stepper Volume (STVOL) is the method used to calculate the volume of an
organ using the RT 3200 Advantage - I Urology software, a Transaxial
Probe, and a mechanical stepping device that moves the probe in fixed
increments. The calculation is based on the fact that each step or area
measurement is taken at equal stepper increments. The area measured at
each slice is then used to compute the total volume of the organ. For more
details, see Section 7.
Stepper Volume
Increment Selection
Before the stepper volume calculation can be made, ensure that the
mechanical stepper increment used matches the ultrasound system stepper spacing selection.
CAUTION
Standard stepper increment movement is 5.0mm. The stepper can be
reconfigured to move in 2.5mm increments. Therefore it is necessary
to match the stepper movement to the ultrasound system software.
Failure to accurately match the mechanical stepper increment to the
ultrasound system stepper spacing will result in improper volume
calculations.
DISPLAY
CONTROL: ____
LED on Control key lights.
Control
▼
CONTROL: T ____
T
▼
Press the "2" or "5" key for the desired step increment spacing registration.
?
2
5
"2" for 2.5 mm spacing for area measurements.
"5" for 5.0 mm spacing for area measurements.
▼
Enter
Press the ENTER key to complete and store the increment spacing
selection.
This selection will remain stored in the system memory until it is changed by
the Control, T function again.
The CONTROL, T function changes the step increment or re-selects the
present step increment which will cause the current volume and slice
number to be cleared. The next area measurement will then be interpreted
as the first slice of a new volume.
46-030370 REV 01
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-43
6-4-3 Stepper Volume
(continued)
Scan Preparation
Select the Stepper Volume measurement by performing the following steps:
DISPLAY
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4 AFI
Calc 2
▼
Use the ARROW keys to select Menu Level 3, STVOL.
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4 AFI
NOTE: While in CALC 2, Menu Level 3 (STVOL), the system slice
increment spacing is displayed in the menu help area to the left
of the GE logo.
It will read :
D = 2.5mm if 2.5 mm increments were selected
D = 5.0mm if 5.0 mm increments were selected
See Illustration 7-19.
CAUTION
6-44
Ensure that the system selection matches the mechanical stepper
increments to be used.
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 01
Illustration 6-4
Stepper Increment Selection
Display
04 / 14 / 92
13 : 59 : 27
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D=5.0mm
G19D54T30
GE
System Stepper Increment Selection
6-4-3 Stepper Volume
Scan Preparation
(continued)
Position the patient as required for the study indicated.
Insert the probe to the first scan location and secure it to the mechanical
stepper device.
Refer to the Transaxial Probe (RA) Operator Manual.
Freeze an image of the organ to be measured. The probe should be
inserted to its most cephalic position (i.e. base of the prostate).
46-030370 REV 01
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-45
6-4-3 Stepper Volume
(continued)
Area Measurements for Each
Slice (Step Increment)
Make the first area measurement by one of three methods: two diameter,
trace or ellipse.
Two Diameter Method
DISPLAY
Dist
▼
T.B.
▼
Press the DIST key.
The LED on the DIST key lights. First cursor "+" appears on the display.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor to the starting point of the first
diameter measurement.
Press SET to fix the first cursor position.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor to the end point of the first
diameter measurement.
Press the MEAS key to record the first diameter measurement.
Meas
▼
(continued)
Illustration 6-5
First Two Diameter Measurements
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11 / 05 / 92
09 : 59 : 27
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+
15
x
15
x
+
x
x
+
G47D48T30
CAL2
6-46
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4 AFI
5 HIP
D=5.0mm
GE
46-030370 REV 01
6-4-3 Stepper Volume
Area Measurements for Each
Slice (Step Increment)
Two Diameter Method
(continued)
▼
Dist
Press the DIST key.
The LED on the DIST key lights. The second cursor "x" appears on the
display.
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor to the starting point of the second
diameter measurement.
Press SET to fix this cursor position.
Set
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move a second cursor to the end point of the
second diameter measurement.
▼
Press the MEAS key to record the second diameter measurement.
Meas
After the MEAS key is pressed for the second diameter, the area and
accumulative volume are calculated and displayed on the lower left side of
the display in the following format:
#XX
VOL
=
XX.X
XXXX
(with decimal point)
This represents the slice number that was just measured, the area of that
slice in square centimeters, and the accumulative volume in cubic centimeters.
After more than one slice has been measured, the current and previous
slice/areas/volumes will be displayed.
NOTE: If the image or the area measurement for this slice are unacceptable, press OFF now. The slice measurement can be
repeated.
Unfreezing an image, without pressing OFF after the second
diameter measurement has been locked in by pressing MEAS,
permanently records the slice area and advances the slice
number. It is not possible to go back and redo a previous slice
measurement without restarting the entire stepper volume
sequence.
Unfreeze the image. Move the mechanical stepper to the next increment.
Repeat the two diameter area measurement steps for each necessary slice.
46-030370 REV 0
1
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-47
Illustration 6-6
Second Two Diameter
Measurements
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
011/ 05/ 92
09 : 26 : 26
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+
18
x
18
x
+
x
x
+
# 1= 1.8
VOL 0.60
# 2= 2.5
VOL 1.80
G47D48T30
CAL2
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4 AFI
5 HIP
D=5.0mm
GE
6-4-3 Stepper Volume
Area Measurements for Each
Slice (Step Increment)
Two Diameter Method
(continued)
Enter
When all slice area measurements have been accomplished:
Press the ENTER key to complete the stepper volume function.
The accumulated volume calculation is displayed on the image monitor and
the internally stored stepper volume is reset to zero.
6-48
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
1
46-030370 REV 0
6-4-3 Stepper Volume
(continued)
Area Measurements for Each
Slice (Step Increment)
Trace Method
Press the TRACE/AREA key. The "+" cursor is displayed.
Trace
Area
▼
T.B.
▼
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
Press SET. The starting point cursor is locked and the "+" cursor changes
to a dot cursor.
Using the TRACKBALL, move the dot cursor to trace the organ to be
measured. The trace is displayed as a continuous curve.
When the trace is completed, press SET to fix the trace outline.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor inside the boundary of the area
being measured.
Press the MEAS key to record the traced area measurement.
Meas
After the MEAS key is pressed, the area is calculated and displayed on the
lower left side of the display in the following format:
#XX
VOL
=
XX.X
XXXX
(with decimal point)
This represents the slice number that was just measured, the area of that slice
in square centimeters and the accumulative volume in cubic centimeters.
NOTE: If the image or the area measurement for this slice are unacceptable, press OFF now. The slice measurement can be
repeated.
Unfreezing an image, without pressing OFF after the second
diameter measurement has been locked in by pressing MEAS,
permanently records the slice area and advances the slice
number. It is not possible to go back and redo a previous slice
measurement without restarting the entire stepper volume
sequence.
Unfreeze the image. Move the mechanical stepper to the next increment.
Repeat the trace/area measurement steps for each necessary slice.
46-030370 REV 1
0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-49
Illustration 6-7
First Trace/Area Measurement
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
011/ 05/ 92
09 : 28 : 52
RA 7MHz
x2.0
+
C+
x
x
51
A+
x
x
1.72
# 1= 1.7
VOL 0.58
G35D48T30
CAL2
Illustration 7-8
Second Trace/Area Measurement
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4 AFI
5 HIP
D=5.0mm
GE
4 AFI
5 HIP
D=5.0mm
GE
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
011/ 05/ 92
09 : 29 : 10
RA 7MHz
x2.0
+
C+
x
x
41
A+
x
x
1.08
# 1= 1.7
VOL 0.58
# 2= 1.1
VOL 1.17
G35D48T30
CAL2
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
6-4-3 Stepper Volume
Area Measurements for Each
Slice (Step Increment)
Trace Method
(continued)
When all slice area measurements have been accomplished:
Press the ENTER key to complete the stepper volume function.
Enter
The accumulated volume calculation is displayed on the image monitor and
the internally stored stepper volume is reset to zero.
6-50
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 01
6-4-3 Stepper Volume
(continued)
Area Measurements for Each
Slice (Step Increment)
Ellipse Method
Trace
Area
Dist
Press the DIST key, then press the TRACE/AREA key. Both the DIST and
TRACE/AREA LEDs will light and the highlighted
cursor will
appear on the screen.
NOTE: Pressing the DIST or TRACE/AREA keys at any time before the
completion of this sequence will exit the ellipse mode and
remove any ellipse graphics from the display.
▼
T. B.
Use the TRACKBALL to position the
verse axis of the ellipse.
cursor at one end of the trans-
▼
Press SET. A second
cursor will appear.
Set
▼
T. B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "+" cursor to the opposite
end of the transverse axis.
Press SET. The ellipse graphic will appear with a 1:1 Aspect Ratio (a circle).
Set
NOTE: The transverse diameter is between the two "+" cursors. The
AP diameter is between the two "x" cursors. The highlighted
"x" cursor is now active.
▼
T. B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "x" cursor to the upper end
of the AP axis.
Press SET. The highlighted "x" cursor is now active.
Set
▼
(continued)
46-030370 REV 0
1
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-51
6-4-3 Stepper Volume
Area Measurements for Each
Slice (Step Increment)
Ellipse Method
(continued)
▼
T. B.
Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "x" cursor to the lower end
of the AP axis.
▼
Press SET. The original "+" cursor is now active.
Set
NOTE: Each time SET is pressed, the cursors become alternately
active. Adjustments to the ellipse may be made as desired.
The highlighted cursor is the active cursor.
▼
Meas
When satisfied with the ellipse, press the MEAS key to record the first area
measurement.
After the MEAS key is pressed, the area is calculated and displayed on the
lower left side of the display in the following format:
#XX
VOL
=
XX.X
XXXX
(with decimal point)
This represents the slice number that was just measured, the area of that
slice in square centimeters and the accumulative volume in cubic centimeters.
NOTE: If the image or the area measurement for this slice are unacceptable, press OFF now. The slice measurement can be
repeated.
Unfreezing an image, without pressing OFF after the second
diameter measurement has been locked in by pressing MEAS,
permanently records the slice area and advances the slice
number. It is not possible to go back and redo a previous slice
measurement without restarting the entire stepper volume
sequence.
Unfreeze the image. Move the mechanical stepper to the next increment.
Repeat the ellipse area measurement steps for each necessary slice.
6-52
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 01
Illustration 6-9
First Ellipse Measurement
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11/ 05 / 92
09 : 20 : 57
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+
12
x
15
x
C+
x
x
43
A+
x
x
1.45
+
x
x
# 1= 1.6
VOL 0.54
G35D48T30
CAL2
Illustration 6-10
Second Ellipse Measurement
1 EDC
2 EFBW
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11/ 05/ 92
09 : 35 : 27
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+
12
x
15
x
C+
x
x
43
A+
x
x
1.45
3 STVOL
4 AFI
5 HIP
D=5.0mm
GE
5 HIP
D=5.0mm
GE
+
x
x
+
# 1= 1.6
VOL 0.54
# 2= 1.5
VOL 1.27
G35D48T30
CAL2
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4 AFI
6-4-3 Stepper Volume
Area Measurements for Each
Slice (Step Increment)
Ellipse Method
(continued)
When all slice area measurements have been accomplished:
Press the ENTER key to complete the stepper volume function.
Enter
The accumulated volume calculation is displayed on the image monitor and
the internally stored stepper volume is reset to zero.
46-030370 REV 01
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-53
6-4-4 Amniotic Fluid
Index
For gestations of 20 weeks or more the Amniotic Fluid Index is determined
by taking a distance measurement of the amniotic fluid in each of the four
quadrants of the uterine cavity. These four measurements are added
together to calculate the Amniotic Fluid Index (AFI). As many as four
Amniotic Fluid Index calculations can be displayed.
DISPLAY
1
EDC
2
EFBW
3
STVOL
4
AFI
Use the ARROW keys to select AFI.
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4
AFI
▼
Calc 2
▼
▼
Dist
After freezing the image. Press the DIST key. The "+" ("x", "x", " X ") cursor
is displayed. ("x" is the second cursor, "x" is the third cursor, " X " is the fourth
cursor.)
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor ("x", "x", " X ") to the measurement starting point.
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+", ("x", "x", " X ") will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Meas
▼
Enter
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite end of
the measurement.
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Unfreeze. Scan the
patient. Freeze the image and make the second, third, and fourth quadrant
measurements.
When all four quadrants have been measured and all four calipers appear
on the screen, press ENTER. The AFI will be calculated and displayed on
the left side of the screen.
NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or
PROBE to erase all measurement results.
To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 2 (LED will go out.)
See the following page for the procedure to calculate additional AFI
measurements.
6-54
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 01
6-4-4 Amniotic Fluid
Index (continued)
Off
The following steps can be repeated to display as many as four AFI
calculations. If you want to check your work follow the procedure below to
calculate an additional AFI.
Press the OFF key. The distance measurements and cursors will be erased.
The previous AFI calculation(s) will remain.
▼
Dist
▼
After freezing the image. Press the DIST key. The "+" ("x", "x", " X ") cursor
is displayed. ("x" is the second cursor, "x" is the third cursor, " X " is the fourth
cursor.)
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor ("x", "x", " X ") to the measurement starting point.
▼
Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+", ("x", "x", " X ") will appear.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Meas
Enter
Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite end of
the measurement.
Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Unfreeze. Scan the
patient. Freeze the image and make the second, third, and fourth quadrant
measurements.
When all four quadrants have been measured, press ENTER. The AFI will
be calculated and displayed on the left side of the screen.
NOTE: These steps can be repeated to display as many as four AFI
calculations. The most recent calculation displays below the
other results.
Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or
PROBE to erase all measurement results.
To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-55
6-4-4 Amniotic Fluid
Index (continued)
The Amniotic Fluid Index is determined by taking a distance measurement
of the amniotic fluid depth in each of four axial quadrants. These four
measurements are used together to formulate the Amniotic Fluid Index (AFI)
Normal values are considered to be:
Dr. Rutherford/Dr. Phelan, Obstetrics & Gynecology, Volume 70, No. 3, Part
1, p. 353-6, Sept. 1987.
36 - 40 weeks
0 - 5 cm = very low
5.1 - 8.0 cm = low
8.1 - 18.0 cm = normal
> 18.0 cm = high
Dr. C. C. Smith, The Female Patient, Volume 15, p. 85-97, March 1990.
28 - 40 weeks
15.0 cm = average
> 20.0 - 24.0 = hydramnios
< 5.0-6.0 = Oligohydramnios
6-56
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-5 Mapping
The system has ten types of curves that translate an image from memory
into a gray scale display.
To switch between Map Package A and Map Package B, use the CONTROL, N function. By pressing CONTROL, N, ENTER, the system will
switch from the current map package to the alternative package.
DISPLAY
Map
N
1
2
3
4
Map
▼
Transformation curve N is selected.
To erase the display press MAP (LED will go out). This setting is kept until
the power is turned off or a probe is changed. Mapping can be automatically
set up by using CONTROL, B function.
Illustration 6-11
Mapping Level N
Package A
(Out)
LEVEL N
(In)
L
M
H
Picture is transformed into a line on a gray scale.
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-57
6-5 Mapping (continued)
Illustration 6-12
Mapping Level 1
Package A
LEVEL 1
(H45)
(Out)
45%
(In)
L
M
H
The echo brightness in higher band is increased. The image becomes softer
and the edges are amplified (ideal for diagnosing soft tissue).
Illustration 6-13
Mapping Level 2
Package A
LEVEL 2
(H50)
(Out)
50%
(In)
L
M
H
The echo brightness in higher band is further increased. The image becomes
softer and the edges are amplified (ideal for diagnosing soft tissue).
6-58
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-5 Mapping (continued)
Illustration 6-14
Mapping Level 3
Package A
LEVEL 3
(M50)
(Out)
25%
50%
25%
(In)
L
M
H
The echo brightness in medium band is increased and shows higher
contrast. The image will become more clear (used for diagnosis of cavity
structures).
Illustration 6-15
Mapping Level 4
Package A
LEVEL 4
(M70)
(Out)
15%
70%
15%
(In)
L
M
H
The echo brightness in medium band is further increased and shows higher
contrast.
46-030370 REV 0
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-59
6-5 Mapping (continued)
Illustration 6-16
Mapping Level N
Package B
LEVEL N
(Out)
(In)
L
M
H
Illustration 6-17
Mapping Level 1
Package B
LEVEL1
50%
L
6-60
M
H
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
6-5 Mapping (continued)
Illustration 6-18
Mapping Level 2
Package B
LEVEL 2
100%
40%
L
M
H
Illustration 6-19
Mapping Level 3
Package B
LEVEL 3
100%
30%
L
M
46-030370 REV 0
H
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
6-61
6-5 Mapping (continued)
Illustration 6-20
Mapping Level 4
Package B
LEVEL 4
100%
25%
L
6-62
M
H
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
SECTION 7
UROLOGY OPTIONS
Overview
Basic Urology Measurements
7.0 MHz Transaxial Probe
Mechanical Stepper/Needle Placement Guide
Stepper Volume Calculation
46-030370 REV 3
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-1
This page intentionally left blank.
7-2
UROLOGY OPTIONS
46-030370 REV 3
SECTION 7
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-1
Overview
This section provides information on additional urology capabilities. The
Stepper Volume calculation allows for area measurements to be taken at
fixed increments. The mechanical stepping device is used to hold the probe
in a fixed position; it moves at fixed intervals to ensure that each area
measurement taken is equally spaced. The 7 MHz Transaxial (RA) Probe
complements the mechanical stepper.
7-2
7-3
Basic Urology
Measurements
Refer to Section 6-3-2 (the volume portion of Calc 1) for specific steps to take
in performing Urology volume measurements.
7.0 MHz Transaxial
Probe
7-3-1
Description
The optional 7.0 MHz Transaxial (RA) Probe is a micro-convex probe for
transaxial prostate scanning.
7-3-2
Parts List
The optional Transaxial (RA) Probe Kit (H4061RA) contents:
1
1
46-285613G1
46-030123
RA Probe and cable (Refer to Illustration 7-1)
RA Probe Operator Manual
Options:
E8386CD
E8386CE
E8385CC
Sanitary Inner Probe Cover (Box of 24)
Finger Cot Sterile Sheath and Bands (Box of 100)
Sanitary Outer Probe Cover (Box of 20)
NOTE: Recommended use with volume stepper device. See Illustration 7-2. Recommended needle size is 18 gauge x 20 cm.
46-030370 REV 3
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-3
Illustration 7-1
RA Probe
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
7-3-3
RA Probe Factory
Presets
The following RT 3200 Advantage - I system parameters will be preset to the
values indicated when the RA Probe is selected:
Image Invert
Image Reverse
Scale Depth
Gain
Dynamic Range
Focus
7-3-4
ON
OFF
X2.0 (7.5cm)
47 db
48 db
3
RA Probe
Preparation
1. Remove the probe from the box and carefully examine it for any
damage.
2. Clean and then disinfect/sterilize the RA Probe. (See Appendix C)
3. Inspect a sterile/sanitary sheath. Place a small amount of ultrasound gel
inside the sheath tip (the gel is between the sheath inner surface and the
probe aperture).
4. Place the sheath tip over the probe aperture and then pull the sheath
end toward the probe handle.
5. Place a rubberband/twist lock over the sheath at the end of the probe
shaft. Ensure the rubberband/twist lock is tight around the sheath. Rub
your finger over the tip of the probe to ensure all air bubbles have been
eliminated.
6. Place a small amount of mineral oil/ultrasound gel on the gel-filled
sheath tip outer surface.
NOTE: Remember to rinse all probe sheaths of powder before placing
on the probe. Powder can degrade the scan image displayed.
7-4
UROLOGY OPTIONS
46-030370 REV 3
7-3-5
Transrectal
Scanning—with
Water Path
(OPTIONAL)
1. Remove the probe from the box and carefully examine it for any
damage.
2. Clean and then disinfect/sterilize the RA Probe. (See Appendix C)
3. Fill the syringe with 60cc of degassed water.
4. Attach tubing to the syringe and remove the air bubbles.
5. Inspect a sterile/sanitary inner sheath (finger cot). Put inner sterile
sheath (finger cot) on the probe and secure it tightly with a rubberband.
Double looping of the rubberband is suggested.
6. Attach the tubing to the probe and inject 30cc of water.
7. Tilt the probe and withdraw water, forcing the air bubbles out first.
Repeat as necessary to remove all air bubbles.
8. Inspect a sterile/sanitary outer sheath. Put a small amount of gel into
the outer sterile sheath.
9. Place the sheath tip over the probe aperture and pull the sheath end
down toward the probe handle.
7-3-6
Use of RA Probe
with Volume
Stepper Device
The 7 MHz Transaxial (RA) Probe is designed to be used with mechanical
stepping device and needle placement guide shown in Illustration 7-2. The
needle placement guide matches the electronic needle placement grid
displayed on the RT 3200 Advantage - I. When used with the stepper
volume calculation option, a "stack-of-coins" method can be used to
calculate the volume of the prostate gland.
NOTE: This product is compatible only with needles of 20 cm in length
and 16 to 20 gauge.
46-030370 REV 3
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-5
7-3-6
Use of RA Probe
with Volume
Stepper Device
(continued)
A typical exam consists of:
•
•
Placing the patient in the supine position.
Carefully inserting a properly prepared RA probe and orient it to scan the
prostate at its most cephalic position.
Position the mechanical stepping device and secure the RA probe to the
stepper. If the needle placement guide is to be used in the exam,
carefully align the probe to the needle placement guide registration line.
Make as many stepper volume measurements as necessary to calculate the volume of the prostate.
Retract the probe (utilizing the stepper device) the necessary step
between each incremental slice of the gland.
Once the complete gland has been evaluated detach the probe from the
mechanical stepper and carefully remove it from the patient.
•
•
•
•
This calculated information can be used for future procedures, if necessary.
Illustration 7-2
RA Probe with Volume Stepper
Device
Needle Placement Guide Template
RA Probe
22
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
-10
MFG. FOR
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
MODEL H4500TB
S. N. 125
Mechanical Stepper Device
Universal Table Mount
NOTE: Sterile/sanitary sheaths are to be used on the probe during its
actual use with patients.
7-6
UROLOGY OPTIONS
46-030370 REV 3
7-3-7
System
Preparation
1. Connect the RA probe connector to the console in either probe position.
RA probe identification shows on the image screen "RA 7.0 MHz" and
the image is displayed.
2. If needed, press CONTROL, L, 1 then press ENTER. The needle
placement grid will be displayed. The image display MUST be inverted
and the scale size set to x1.5 or x2.0 to display the needle placement
grid.
3. Set the console for recommended optimum imaging. (This may be
different than the machine default settings.)
Scale - X2.0 Focus - 2-3
Image Direction - RVS -(OFF)
Image Invert - ON
NOTE: With the image invert key ON, the image direction key (RVS)
should be OFF for proper orientation.
7-3-8
Infection Control
Users of this product have an obligation and responsibility to provide the
highest degree of infection control possible to patients, co-workers and
themselves.
To avoid cross contamination, follow all infection control policies established
for your office, department or hospital as they apply to personnel and
equipment.
7-3-9
Patient
Preparation for
Transrectal
Imaging
1. Prepare the patient. An enema is recommended one hour before the
exam.
2. Transaxial imaging is best performed with the patient in the supine
position.
46-030370 REV 3
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-7
Illustration 7-3
Ultrasound Gel Placement
Gel
Sterile
Sheath
Place a small amount of
ultrasound gel inside the
sterile/sanitary sheath
Carefully handle the Transaxial (RA) Probe. Dropping, mishandling, or
knocking the probe or lens against any object can damage it. Protect
the lens (aperture) from any sharp object.
CAUTION
Illustration 7-4
Sterile/Sanitary Sheath Placement
Optional Finger Cot
for Water Path
4
6
Sterile/Sanitary Outer Sheath
8
10
Optional Finger Cot
Rubberband for Water
Path
7-8
UROLOGY OPTIONS
12
14
16
18
20
Twist lock
22
Optional Water Path Inlet
46-030370 REV 3
7-3-10 Patient Scan
1. Scan the patient. The probe handle orientation mark indicates the image
scan plane. Be sure that the Image Reverse function is OFF.
2. If necessary, rotate, retract, or advance the probe to see all pertinent
anatomy.
3. When the probe is in position, attach it to the mechanical stepping
device.
Steps for attaching probe to stepper:
a.
b.
c.
d.
CAUTION
Place the probe into clamp.
Tighten the probe clamp.
Attach the needle placement guide.
Align the probe to the needle placement guide.
Ensure that the arrow at the bottom center of the Needle Placement
Guide accurately aligns to the center line marked on the probe shaft.
Failure to do so will cause needle placement not to match the ultrasound display.
4. If a needle placement is to be performed, display the needle placement
grid on the image screen by:
a. Ensuring that the Image Reverse function is OFF and the Image
Invert function is ON.
b. Pressing the CONTROL, L, 1, and ENTER keys. The needle
placement grid will be displayed.
c.
Select the desired scale factor and focus.
To turn the needle placement grid display OFF, press the CONTROL,
L, 1, and ENTER keys again. The needle placement grid will be erased
(the image display will not be affected).
CAUTION
Before needle insertion, scan the patient to determine the correct
puncture depth and site.
Only the sterile/sanitary sheath, rubberband or twist lock and finger
cot with rubberband are on the RA probe during the pre-needle
placement scanning.
46-030370 REV 3
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-9
7-3-10 Patient Scan
(continued)
5. When the examination is over:
a. Carefully remove the probe.
b. Remove the twist lock. Remove and discard the sheath.
c.
7-10
UROLOGY OPTIONS
Thoroughly clean the probe and equipment. Refer to your institution's
infection control guidelines for disinfection/sterilization protocols.
See Appendix C for cleaning and sterilization instructions. Return
the probe to its box.
46-030370 REV 3
Illustration 7-5
RA Probe Needle Placement
Grid Display
Anterior
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11/ 05 / 92
09 : 40 : 23
RA 7MHz
x2.0
Right
+
+
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A
B
12
+
11
.
10
+
9
.
8
+
7
.
6
+
5
.
4
+
3
.
2
+
1
.
0
G35D48T40
+
+
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
C
D
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
+
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
E
F
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
+
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
G
H
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
+
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
J
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
+
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
K
L
M
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
.
.
+
.
+
.
Left
+
.
+
.
+
.
+
GE
Posterior
NOTE: The Image Reverse Function is "OFF". Image Invert Function
is "ON".
Illustration 7-6
Scan Plane Orientation—
Sagittal View
Anterior
Right
Left
Posterior
46-030370 REV 3
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-11
▲
Illustration 7-7
Transrectal Image Orientation—
Axial View
Scan Plane
Anterior
C
B
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
A
Posterior
Illustration 7-8
Transrectal Image Orientation—
Screen Display
Anterior
04 / 14 / 92
13 : 59 : 27
RA 7MHz
x2.0
Left
Right
G19D54T30
GE
Posterior
7-12
UROLOGY OPTIONS
46-030370 REV 3
7-3
Mechanical Stepper/
Needle Placement
Guide
This mechanical stepping device is intended to be used only with the RT
3200 Advantage - I (with the Urology Options Upgrade - H4500TA) and the
7 MHz Transaxial (RA) Probe (H4061RA).
7-3-1
Parts
Identification
The H4500TB Mechanical Stepping Device Kit consists of the following:
1
1
1
1
46-285614P1
46-286615P1
46-285616P1
46-030124
Probe Holder and Stepping Mechanism
Needle Placement Guide Template
Universal Table Mounting System
Needle Placement Guide/Stepper Operator Manual
The variable position mechanical stepping device is used to hold the 7 MHz
Transaxial (RA) Probe, lock the probe in place and move the probe in small
increments throughout an organ in cross-sectional slice (see Illustration 7-9). Used with the RT 3200 Advantage - I Stepper Volume Calculation,
a complete 3 dimensional volume calculation can be made of an organ.
Illustration 7-9
Probe Holder and Stepping
Mechanism 46-285614P1
22
02
-10
46-030370 REV 0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-13
7-3-1
Parts
Identification
(continued)
The needle placement guide template matches the RT 3200 Advantage - I
electronic needle placement grid for the 7 MHz Transaxial (RA) Probe to aid
in needle placement (see Illustration 7-10).
Illustration 7-10
Needle Placement Guide
46-286615P1
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A B C D E
I J K L M
The universal table mounting system holds the stepper and is compatible
with most radiology and urologic tables (see Illustration 7-11).
Illustration 7-11
Universal Table Mounting System
46-285616P1
7-14
UROLOGY OPTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
7-3-2
Control/
Adjustment
Description
See Illustrations 7-12 and 7-13 for the location and brief description of the
parts for the Mechanical Stepper.
Illustration 7-12
Assembled Parts with 7MHz
Transaxial Probe
Right Side View
Needle Placement Guide Template
Adjustable Slide Marker—
sets reference point for
stepper movement
22
90
80
70
60
MFG. FOR
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
MODEL H4500TB
S. N. 125
50
40
30
20
10
0
20
18
16
7.0 MHz Transaxial Probe
14
12
10
8
6
4
-10
Needle Placement
Guide Locking Knob—
locks guide to probe
Mounting Bar Locking
Knob—locks stepper to
mounting bar
Mounting Bar
Universal Table
Mount Clamp
Locking Lever—
course angle adjustment of mounting bar
and stepper unit
46-030370 REV 0
Universal Table Mount
Adjusting Knobs—
adjusts distance from
stepper unit to table mount
Universal
Table Mount
Clamp
Mounting Bar Locking
Knob—adjusts height
of stepper unit
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-15
Illustration 7-13
Assembled Parts with 7MHz
Transaxial Probe
Left Side View
Needle Placement Guide Template
7.0 MHz Transaxial Probe
Probe Cradle Clamp
Locking Knob—locks
probe to stepper unit
Probe Cradle Clamp
4
6
8
10
21
14
16
18
22
02
-10
Needle Placement
Guide Locking Knob—
locks guide to probe
UROLOGY OPTIONS
10
20
30
Probe Cradle
Tension Adjustment—
adjusts stepper movement
tension
Universal Table Mount
Adjusting Knobs—
adjusts distance from
stepper unit to table mount
7-16
0
40
50
60
70
80
90
Stepper
Advance/
Retract
Knob
Stepper Angle
Adjustment
Knob—locks
stepper angle
position (fine
adjustment)
Universal Table
Mount Clamp
Locking Lever—
course angle adjustment of mounting bar
and stepper unit
46-030370 REV 0
7-3-3
Alternate
Assembly
Standard assembly is as shown in Illustration 7-12 and 7-13. The Needle
Placement Guide need only be attached to the probe if needle guidance is
required in the study.
The Mechanical Stepper is factory assembled to move in 5mm increments.
By removing the upper half of the stepper assembly (Illustration 7-14) and
reversing its attachment to the lower half (Illustration 7-15), the stepper will
move in 2.5mm increments.
CAUTION
Standard stepper increment movement is 5.0mm. Assembly for
2.5mm increment movement is available as an option. Therefore it is
necessary to match the stepper movement to the ultrasound system
software. Failure to accurately match the mechanical stepper increment to the ultrasound system stepper spacing will result in improper
volume calculations.
Illustration 7-14
Probe Holder Removal
22
90
80
70
60
20
30
50
40
30
20
0
10
20
-10
MFG. FOR
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
MODEL H4500TB
S. N. 125
Illustration 7-15
Assembly for 2.5mm Stepping
22
02
-10
0
10
40
50
60
70
80
90
MFG. FOR
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
MODEL H4500TB
S. N. 125
46-030370 REV 0
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-17
7-3-3
Alternate
Assembly
(continued)
The CONTROL, T function changes the step increment or re-selects the
present step increment which will cause the current volume and slice
number to be cleared. The next area measurement will then be interpreted
as the first slice of a new volume.
DISPLAY
CONTROL:____
LED on Control key lights.
Control
▼
CONTROL: T ____
T
▼
2
Press the "2" or "5" key for the desired step increment spacing registration.
?
5
"2" for 2.5 mm spacing for area measurements.
"5" for 5.0 mm spacing for area measurements.
▼
Press ENTER to complete and store the increment spacing selection.
Enter
This selection will remain stored in the system memory until it is changed by
the Control, T function again.
7-18
UROLOGY OPTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
7-3-4
Lithotomy
(Stirrup) Table
Mounting
The Stepper Mounting Bar can be repositioned to extend horizontally from
the stepper body (See Illustration 7-16). This allows the stepper to be
mounted to common Lithotomy (Stirrup) Tables if the Universal Table Mount
is not used.
Illustration 7-16
Mounting Bar Repositioning
View 1
22
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
20
-10
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
MFG
GE MED. FOR
ICA
MODEL L SYSTEMS
H45
S. N. 125 00TB
View 2
46-030370 REV 0
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-19
7-3-5
Typical Use
The stepping device is utilized to accurately calculate an organ's volume by
stepping through the organ in 5mm increments. This is also available in
2.5mm increments. (Refer to Illustrations 7-14 and 7-15). The device is
most commonly used to calculate prostate volume for seed implant therapy.
Volume is used in the pre-planning for seed placement and also utilized
during the surgical procedure to guide the user in the placement of the
seeds.
Stepper/Probe Attachment
Turn the advance/retract knob to place the stepper in its fully retracted
position.
•
Set the slide marker towards the rear of the stepper as a reference.
•
Advance the stepper. (Use the slide marker as a reference. Each mark
equals 5.0mm.)
•
Place the stepper and mounting bar into the universal table mount
clamp. Make a course adjustment to align it with the patient. Tighten
the mounting bar locking knob and universal table mount locking knob.
•
Gently insert the properly prepared 7.0 MHz transaxial probe into the
patient. (Refer to the Transaxial Probe (RA) Operator Manual for probe
preparation.)
•
If needed, attach the needle placement guide template. Secure the
needle placement guide to the transaxial probe.
•
Be sure to align the probe center line with the
placement guide as shown in Illustration 7-17.
•
Place the probe cradle clamp over the transaxial probe and partially
tighten the clamp locking knob.
•
Position the probe to find the cephalic position of the gland.
•
If necessary, adjust the probe/stepper position by using the:
¤
¤
¤
¤
7-20
UROLOGY OPTIONS
➔
•
mark on the needle
Universal table mount clamp locking knob
Mounting bar locking knob
Stepper angle adjusting knob
Universal table mount adjusting knobs
46-030370 REV 0
7-3-5
Typical Use
(continued)
NOTE: Ensure that the alignment marks on the probe shaft and needle
placement guide are still in alignment. This ensures that the
needle guide aligns with the system electronic grid. Failure to
align the needle placement guide arrow marker with the probe
shaft center line will cause inaccurate needle placement.
Illustration 7-17
Probe Shaft and Needle Placement
Guide Alignment
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A B C D E
I J K L M
C D E
14
14
1
6
12
7-3-6
12
I J K
•
Once the probe is in position and properly aligned, tightly secure the
probe to the stepper with the probe cradle clamp locking knob.
•
Set the slide marker to a reference mark near the back of the stepper
mechanism.
Periodic
Maintenance
Inspect the following before each use:
•
•
•
•
46-030370 REV 0
Needle placement guide for cleanliness and damage.
Universal table mount for cleanliness.
Stepper ratchet mechanism for smooth operation. (no binding)
Check the hardware for burrs and sharp edges.
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-21
7-3-7
Cleaning and
Sterilization
Infection Control
Users of this product have an obligation and responsibility to provide the
highest degree of infection control possible to patients, co-workers and
themselves.
To avoid cross contamination, follow all infection control policies established
for your office, department or hospital as they apply to personnel and
equipment.
Cleaning
Disinfection/Sterilization
•
Wash the stepper, needle placement guide and universal table mount
with warm, mild, non-abrasive strong detergent solution below 26°C
(80°F).
•
Use a cleaning brush provided to clean the holes in the needle
placement guide.
•
Once all parts are clean, rinse with clear fresh water and dry all parts
thoroughly.
•
Disinfect or sterilize in a suitable glutaraldehyde based solution, without
surfactants using the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for concentration and time of contact.
A typical disinfection soak time is 10 minutes.
A typical sterilization soak time is 10 hours.
•
Rinse thoroughly in sterile distilled water for 15 minutes and wrap in
surgical wrap to maintain a disinfected/sterile environment.
Autoclaving or gas sterilization of any kind is not recommended.
7-3-8
Replacement
Parts
Replacement parts can be obtained through GE Medical Systems Accessories, by calling 1-800-472-3666 or GE Medical Direct Customer Order
Service at 1-800-558-2040.
Available parts are:
•
•
•
•
•
7-22
UROLOGY OPTIONS
46-285614P1
H4500TT
46-285616P1
46-285619G1
E8323GD
Mechanical Stepper Mechanism with Mounting Bar
Needle Placement Guide Template
Universal Table Mount with Clamp
Cleaning Kit
Cleaning Brushes for Template (H4500TT)
46-030370 REV 0
7-4
Stepper Volume
Calculation
7-4-1
Stepper Volume
Formula
Stepper Volume (STVOL) is the method used to calculate the volume of an
organ using the RT 3200 Advantage - I Urology software, Transaxial Probe
and a mechanical stepping device that moves the probe in fixed increments.
The calculation is based on the fact that each step or area measurement is
taken at equal stepper increments. The area measured at each slice is then
used to compute the total volume of the organ, according to the following
model:
For N slices, there are N-1 volumes between the slices plus a small volume
at each end.
It is assumed that the small volumes of the end caps are cones with a base
equal to the measured area of the end slice and height equal to the slice
spacing. The cones will have volumes V=A1d/3 and V=ANd/3 for slices 1 and
N respectively, where d is the spacing between the slices.
The volumes between the slices are assumed to be segments of a
paraboloid of revolution, where the volume between any slice n and n+1 is
(An+An+1)d/2.
The sum of the volumes between slices is:
A1+A2
V=d [ ( 2
)+(
A2+A3
AN-1+An
2 )+...+( 2 )]
Therefore, the total volume of the organ is calculated as:
5
5
V=d [ ( 6 )A1+A2+A3+...+AN-1+( 6 )AN]
Illustration 7-18
Scan Plane Orientation
of the Prostate
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
46-030370 REV 0
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-23
7-4-2
Basic Principles
of Operation
The stepper volume measurement works ONLY in B-Mode. Stepper
volumes are not accumulated in either B/M- or M-Mode. Stepper Volume
will only be functional with the RA Probe attached.
A stepper volume measurement begins when the first area measurement is
made while the system is in the CALC 2, Menu Level 3 STVOL (stepper
volume) function.
The volume measurement ends when the ENTER key is pressed while at
CALC 2, Menu Level 3 (STVOL). If ENTER is pressed while in B/M- or
M-Mode, the keystroke is ignored and the system emits a beep.
During the measurement operation, pressing the ENTER key resets the
internal memory to enable a new volume measurement to begin and
displays the completed volume on the lower left side of the image display
under the last accumulated volume calculation.
The CONTROL, T function changes the step increment or reselects the
present step increment which will cause the current volume and slice
number to be cleared. The next area measurement will then be interpreted
as the first slice of a new volume.
The OFF key is used to reject a slice area measurement. When the OFF key
is pressed:
•
•
•
•
The measurement graphics are erased.
The slice #, area and volume in the scrolling area (lower left portion of
the display) remain the same.
The current slice number and area are reset, but all previous measurements are retained.
The rejected slice data remains on the screen. It will be scrolled up when
the slice measurement is repeated.
The measurement can now be repeated on the frozen image or unfreeze
and change the parameters. Refreeze the image and repeat the slice
measurement on the new image.
After the measurement has been repeated, the old data will be scrolled up
and the same slice # with the new data will be displayed in the scrolling area.
If OFF is pressed followed by ENTER, the volume is equal to the accumulated volume of the last accepted slice.
Once the image is unfrozen, the slice area is calculated from the measurement and a new measurement for that increment (slice) can NOT be made.
7-24
UROLOGY OPTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
7-4-2
Basic Principles
of Operation
(continued)
Unfreezing the image after a measurement has been made, without
pressing OFF, is a sign that the measurement has been accepted. The
system calculates the slice area and advances to the next slice for a
measurement.
The last four (4) lines of this scrolling area of the image display will then
read:
#1 =
VOL
#2 =
VOL
XX.X
XXXX
XX.X
XXXX
Slice # & Area
Accumulative Volume
Slice # & Area
Accumulative Volume
The volume is in cubic centimeters and includes a decimal point, as
displayed for the current CALC 1 VOL calculation.
The internal parameters relevant to the stepper volume measurement are
at three levels: the current slice number/area measurement, the last slice
number/area/volume, and the volume data displayed on the left side of the
image monitor. These parameters are reset as outlined in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1
Measurement Parameter Resets
Current slice #, area
under measurement
Last slice #,
area, volume
NEW PATIENT or
power-up
RESET
RESET
RESET
CONTROL, T, 2 or
CONTROL, T, 5
RESET
RESET
HOLD
OFF, B/M-MODE,
PROBE or SCALE
RESET
HOLD
HOLD
Function
7-4-3
Monitor
Display
Stepper Volume
Increment
Selection
Before the stepper volume calculation can be made, ensure that the
mechanical stepper increment used matches the ultrasound system stepper spacing selection.
CAUTION
46-030370 REV 0
Standard stepper increment movement is 5.0mm. The stepper can be
reconfigured to move in 2.5mm increments. Therefore it is necessary
to match the stepper movement to the ultrasound system software.
Failure to accurately match the mechanical stepper increment to the
ultrasound system stepper spacing will result in improper volume
calculations.
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-25
7-4-3
Stepper Volume
Increment
Selection
(continued)
DISPLAY
CONTROL: ____
LED on Control key lights.
Control
▼
CONTROL: T ____
T
▼
Press the "2" or "5" key for the desired step increment spacing registration.
?
2
5
"2" for 2.5 mm spacing for area measurements.
"5" for 5.0 mm spacing for area measurements.
▼
Enter
Press the ENTER key to complete and store the increment spacing
selection.
This selection will remain stored in the system memory until it is changed by
the Control, T function again.
The CONTROL, T function changes the step increment or re-selects the
present step increment which will cause the current volume and slice
number to be cleared. The next area measurement will then be interpreted
as the first slice of a new volume.
7-4-4
Scan Preparation
Select the Stepper Volume measurement by performing the following steps:
DISPLAY
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4 AFI
5 HIP
Calc 2
▼
Use the ARROW keys to select Menu Level 3, STVOL.
1 EDC
7-26
UROLOGY OPTIONS
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4 AFI
5 HIP
46-030370 REV 0
7-4-4
Scan Preparation
(continued)
NOTE: While in CALC 2, Menu Level 3 (STVOL), the system slice
increment spacing is displayed in the menu help area to the left
of the GE logo.
It will read :
D = 2.5mm if 2.5 mm increments were selected
D = 5.0mm if 5.0 mm increments were selected
See Illustration 7-19.
CAUTION
Ensure that the system selection matches the mechanical stepper
increments to be used.
Illustration 7-19
Stepper Increment Selection
Display
04 / 14 / 92
13 : 59 : 27
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D=5.0mm
G19D54T30
GE
System Stepper Increment Selection
Position the patient as required for the study indicated.
Insert the probe to the first scan location and secure it to the mechanical
stepper device.
Refer to the Transaxial Probe (RA) Operator Manual.
Freeze an image of the organ to be measured. The probe should be
inserted to its most cephalic position (i.e. base of the prostate).
46-030370 REV 0
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-27
7-4-5
Area
Measurements
for Each Slice
(Step Increment)
Make the first area measurement by one of three methods: two diameter,
trace or ellipse.
Two Diameter Method
DISPLAY
Dist
▼
T.B.
▼
Press the DIST key.
The LED on the DIST key lights. First cursor "+" appears on the display.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor to the starting point of the first
diameter measurement.
Press SET to fix the first cursor position.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor to the end point of the first
diameter measurement.
Press the MEAS key to record the first diameter measurement.
Meas
▼
(continued)
Illustration 7-20
First Two Diameter
Measurements
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11 / 05 / 92
09 : 59 : 27
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+
15
x
15
x
+
x
x
+
G47D48T30
CAL2
7-28
UROLOGY OPTIONS
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4 AFI
5 HIP
D=5.0mm
GE
46-030370 REV 0
7-4-5
Area
Measurements
for Each Slice
Two Diameter Method
(continued)
▼
Dist
Press the DIST key.
The LED on the DIST key lights. The second cursor "x" appears on the
display.
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor to the starting point of the second
diameter measurement.
Press SET to fix this cursor position.
Set
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move a second cursor to the end point of the
second diameter measurement.
▼
Press the MEAS key to record the second diameter measurement.
Meas
After the MEAS key is pressed for the second diameter, the area and
accumulative volume are calculated and displayed on the lower left side of
the display in the following format:
#XX
VOL
=
XX.X
XXXX
(with decimal point)
This represents the slice number that was just measured, the area of that
slice in square centimeters, and the accumulative volume in cubic centimeters.
After more than one slice has been measured, the current and previous
slice/areas/volumes will be displayed.
NOTE: If the image or the area measurement for this slice are
unacceptable, press OFF now. The slice measurement can be
repeated.
Unfreezing an image, without pressing OFF after the second
diameter measurement has been locked in by pressing MEAS,
permanently records the slice area and advances the slice
number. It is not possible to go back and redo a previous slice
measurement without restarting the entire stepper volume
sequence.
Unfreeze the image. Move the mechanical stepper to the next increment.
Repeat the two diameter area measurement steps for each necessary slice.
46-030370 REV 0
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-29
Illustration 7-21
Second Two Diameter
Measurements
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
011/ 05/ 92
09 : 26 : 26
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+
18
x
18
x
+
x
x
+
# 1= 1.8
VOL 0.60
# 2= 2.5
VOL 1.80
G47D48T30
CAL2
7-4-5
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4 AFI
5 HIP
D=5.0mm
GE
Area
Measurements
for Each Slice
Two Diameter Method
(continued)
When all slice area measurements have been accomplished:
Press the ENTER key to complete the stepper volume function.
Enter
The accumulated volume calculation is displayed on the image monitor and
the internally stored stepper volume is reset to zero.
7-30
UROLOGY OPTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
7-4-5
Area
Measurements
for Each Slice
(continued)
Trace Method
Press the TRACE/AREA key. The "+" cursor is displayed.
Trace
Area
▼
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
point.
▼
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Press SET. The starting point cursor is locked and the "+" cursor changes
to a dot cursor.
Using the TRACKBALL, move the dot cursor to trace the organ to be
measured. The trace is displayed as a continuous curve.
When the trace is completed, press SET to fix the trace outline.
Set
▼
T.B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor inside the boundary of the area
being measured.
Press the MEAS key to record the traced area measurement.
Meas
After the MEAS key is pressed, the area is calculated and displayed on the
lower left side of the display in the following format:
#XX
VOL
=
XX.X
XXXX
(with decimal point)
This represents the slice number that was just measured, the area of that
slice in square centimeters and the accumulative volume in cubic centimeters.
NOTE: If the image or the area measurement for this slice are
unacceptable, press OFF now. The slice measurement can be
repeated.
Unfreezing an image, without pressing OFF after the second
diameter measurement has been locked in by pressing MEAS,
permanently records the slice area and advances the slice
number. It is not possible to go back and redo a previous slice
measurement without restarting the entire stepper volume
sequence.
Unfreeze the image. Move the mechanical stepper to the next increment.
Repeat the trace/area measurement steps for each necessary slice.
46-030370 REV 0
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-31
Illustration 7-22
First Trace/Area Measurement
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
011/ 05/ 92
09 : 28 : 52
RA 7MHz
x2.0
+
C+
x
x
51
A+
x
x
1.72
# 1= 1.7
VOL 0.58
G35D48T30
CAL2
Illustration 7-23
Second Trace/Area Measurement
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4 AFI
5 HIP
D=5.0mm
GE
4 AFI
5 HIP
D=5.0mm
GE
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
011/ 05/ 92
09 : 29 : 10
RA 7MHz
x2.0
+
C+
x
x
41
A+
x
x
1.08
# 1= 1.7
VOL 0.58
# 2= 1.1
VOL 1.17
G35D48T30
CAL2
7-4-5
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
Area
Measurements
for Each Slice
Trace Method (continued)
When all slice area measurements have been accomplished:
Press the ENTER key to complete the stepper volume function.
Enter
The accumulated volume calculation is displayed on the image monitor and
the internally stored stepper volume is reset to zero.
7-32
UROLOGY OPTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
7-4-5
Area
Measurements
for Each Slice
(continued)
Ellipse Method
Trace
Area
Dist
Press the DIST key, then press the TRACE/AREA key. Both the DIST and
TRACE/AREA LEDs will light and the highlighted
cursor will appear on
the screen.
NOTE: Pressing the DIST or TRACE/AREA keys at any time before the
completion of this sequence will exit the ellipse mode and
remove any ellipse graphics from the display.
▼
T. B.
Use the TRACKBALL to position the
verse axis of the ellipse.
cursor at one end of the trans-
▼
Set
Press SET. A second
cursor will appear.
▼
T. B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "+" cursor to the opposite
end of the transverse axis.
Press SET. The ellipse graphic will appear with a 1:1 Aspect Ratio (a circle).
Set
NOTE: The transverse diameter is between the two "+" cursors. The
AP diameter is between the two "x" cursors. The highlighted
"x" cursor is now active.
▼
T. B.
▼
Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "x" cursor to the upper end
of the AP axis.
Press SET. The highlighted "x" cursor is now active.
Set
▼
(continued)
46-030370 REV 0
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-33
7-4-5
Area
Measurements
for Each Slice
Ellipse Method
(continued)
▼
T. B.
Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "x" cursor to the lower end
of the AP axis.
▼
Press SET. The original "+" cursor is now active.
Set
NOTE: Each time SET is pressed, the cursors become alternately
active. Adjustments to the ellipse may be made as desired.
The highlighted cursor is the active cursor.
▼
Meas
When satisfied with the ellipse, press the MEAS key to record the first area
measurement.
After the MEAS key is pressed, the area is calculated and displayed on the
lower left side of the display in the following format:
#XX
VOL
=
XX.X
XXXX
(with decimal point)
This represents the slice number that was just measured, the area of that
slice in square centimeters and the accumulative volume in cubic centimeters.
NOTE: If the image or the area measurement for this slice are
unacceptable, press OFF now. The slice measurement can be
repeated.
Unfreezing an image, without pressing OFF after the second
diameter measurement has been locked in by pressing MEAS,
permanently records the slice area and advances the slice
number. It is not possible to go back and redo a previous slice
measurement without restarting the entire stepper volume
sequence.
Unfreeze the image. Move the mechanical stepper to the next increment.
Repeat the ellipse area measurement steps for each necessary slice.
7-34
UROLOGY OPTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
Illustration 7-24
First Ellipse Measurement
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11/ 05 / 92
09 : 20 : 57
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+
12
x
15
x
C+
x
x
43
A+
x
x
1.45
+
x
x
# 1= 1.6
VOL 0.54
G35D48T30
CAL2
Illustration 7-25
Second Ellipse Measurement
1 EDC
2 EFBW
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11/ 05/ 92
09 : 35 : 27
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+
12
x
15
x
C+
x
x
43
A+
x
x
1.45
3 STVOL
4 AFI
5 HIP
D=5.0mm
GE
5 HIP
D=5.0mm
GE
+
x
x
+
# 1= 1.6
VOL 0.54
# 2= 1.5
VOL 1.27
G35D48T30
CAL2
7-4-5
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 STVOL
4 AFI
Area
Measurements
for Each Slice
Ellipse Method
(continued)
When all slice area measurements have been accomplished:
Enter
Press the ENTER key to complete the stepper volume function.
The accumulated volume calculation is displayed on the image monitor and
the internally stored stepper volume is reset to zero.
46-030370 REV 0
UROLOGY OPTIONS
7-35
This page intentionally left blank.
7-36
UROLOGY OPTIONS
46-030370 REV 0
SECTION 8
ACCESSORIES
Overview
Accessory Panels
Connecting a Sony Page Printer
Connecting a Panasonic VCR
Connecting a Multi-Image Camera
46-030370 REV 2
ACCESSORIES
8-1
This page intentionally left blank.
8-2
ACCESSORIES
46-030370 REV 2
SECTION 8
ACCESSORIES
8-1 Overview
8-2 Accessory Panels
8-2-1 Lower Accessory
Panel
The RT 3200 Advantage - I provides accessory connections for some
standard and optional accessories. Standard with the system is the foot
switch and Sony UP-890 Video Graphic Printer. Optional is the Panasonic
AG-5200/AG-1260/AG-1270 VHS Video Cassette Recorders, Multi-Image
Camera, External Monitor or Data Management Center Computer.
Two panels provide connections for the variety of accessories.
The lower accessory panel is the primary panel used for connection. It is
easily accessible at the front of the system and offers the connections
necessary for several options. Illustrations 8-1 and 8-2 show the location
and layout of the lower accessory panel.
Illustration 8-1
Lower Accessory Panel Location
1
2
Lower Accessory Panel
RS-232C
Ext TV
Ext TV
In
Out
Camera &
TV Printer
In
Out
Video Out
Shutter
12Vdc
Foot Switch
for Camera
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.
46-030370 REV 2
ACCESSORIES
8-3
Illustration 8-2
Lower Accessory Panel Layout
RS-232C
Ext TV
Ext TV
In
Out
Camera &
TV Printer
In
Out
Video Out
12Vdc
Foot Switch
for Camera
Shutter
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.
1
2
3
4
6
5
The lower accessory panel provides the following connections:
1. RS-232C interface connection for the GE Data Management Center
Computer (ONLY AVAILABLE WITH RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - II)
2. External Monitor Video Connections (camera or viewing monitor)–
(composite video)
3. Video Cassette Recorder Video (composite video)
4. Camera and Video Printer video output and shutter control (composite video)
5. 12 Vdc power available for accessories
6. Freeze Foot Switch connection
NOTE: The external TV (EXT TV) and VCR video output are the same.
Connection made to both of these simultaneously will cause
the output to be double terminated.
Electrical
Hazard
8-4
ACCESSORIES
To avoid injury, the installation of accessories that require the removal
of system covers to access interior wiring MUST be done by a qualified
service person.
46-030370 REV 2
8-2-2 Upper Accessory
Panel
Located in the cable well behind the main keyboard under the removable
magnetic panel, the Upper Accessory Panel provides additional connections for accessories. Illustration 8-3 shows the connections available on the
Upper Accessory Panel.
Illustration 8-3
Upper Accessory Panel Layout
1
2
3
TV Printer
12Vdc
In
Shutter
Out
Video Out
4
The Upper Accessory Panel provides the following connections:
1. VCR Video Connections (composite video)
2. Camera or Video Page Printer shutter and video connections
3. 12 Vdc accessory power connection
4. Grommet for AC power cord routing
46-030370 REV 2
ACCESSORIES
8-5
8-3 Sony Video Graphic
Printer Installation
8-3-1 System
Disassembly
1. Loosen the four (4) screws mounting the printer shelf to the bottom of
the keyboard. Slide the shelf and remove it from the keyboard.
2. Remove the front panel by removing five (5) screws.
•
Three are located at the top of the front panel that attach it to the
bottom of the keyboard housing.
•
The remaining two are located, one on the bottom right side and one
on the bottom left side of the front panel, behind two white rubber
hole plugs.
3. Remove the RF shield by removing eight (8) screws.
4. Gain access to the AC power strip by removing the front connector
panel.
•
Remove the four (4) screws, two on each side of the panel.
•
Push in and slide the panel to the left.
•
Pull it out as far as the wiring will permit and carefully lay it aside.
8-3-2 Page Printer
Power Hook-up
5. Locate the AC power terminal strip (see Illustration 8-4).
•
In front is a black twelve (12) connection terminal strip.
THAT IS NOT IT!!!
•
Look toward the back of the system, just below that 12 terminal
block.
•
Mounted on the back of the power supply bulkhead is a black six (6)
terminal block with three (3) wires attached to terminals 4, 5 and 6.
THIS IS THE ONE!!!
6. Remove the clear terminal strip shield. Connect AC power cord for the
Sony UP-890 as follows:
#4—Black Wire
8-6
ACCESSORIES
#5—Green Wire
#6—White Wire
46-030370 REV 2
Illustration 8-4
AC Power Terminal
Probe Connector Board
1
2
3
4
5
6
AC Terminal Strip
8-3-3 System
Re-assembly
7. Replace the clear terminal strip cover. Route the AC power cord behind
the RF shield, up from the terminal strip to the top of the RF shield and
out the square notch. Remove white cover from across notch.
8. Re-attach the front panel connector assembly (4 screws).
9. Replace the RF shield and secure it with the eight (8) screws.
10. Replace the front panel cover with the three (3) screws on top and two
behind the white rubber covers.
11. Connect the video cable and remote shutter cable to the front accessory
panel.
46-030370 REV 2
ACCESSORIES
8-7
8-3-4 Mount and
Secure Printer
Shelf
12. Start 4 (M4 x .7 x 8mm) screws into the bottom of the keyboard housing.
Choose the four threaded holes that are on the left side under the TGC
slide pots. (They line up with the holes in the printer shelf).
We recommend you use a thread locking fluid on these screws like
Locktite 242 (blue).
13. Push the printer shelf up on to the four screws through the key hole slots.
Slide the shelf back into the key holes and secure the four (4) screws.
8-3-5 Mount and
Connect the
Printer
14. Remove the screws from the center of the four rubber feet on the Sony
UP-890 page printer.
15. Slide the printer into the shelf. Connect the remote shutter, video and
power cables to the back of the Sony Printer.
16. Pick the holes in the bottom of the printer shelf that line up with the Sony
Page Printer. Secure the Sony Printer to the printer shelf by using four
screws (M3 x .5 x 10mm) through the shelf into the center of the rubber
feet. These screws are found in the small plastic bag that come with the
plate to cover the accessory well below the monitor.
We recommend you use a thread locking fluid on these screws like
Locktite 242 (blue).
17. Power up the system and check the operation of the Sony UP-890.
8-8
ACCESSORIES
•
See the operator manual and use the RECORD button on the
keyboard of the RT 3200 Advantage - I.
•
Insure that the proper gamma curve is selected for the record
output. CONTROL, R, V, ENTER.
46-030370 REV 2
Illustration 8-6
Sony Connection
Sony UP-890
R E S E R V E D
REMOTE GAMMA
I
II
III
DIP SW
PAPER
TYPE
I
II
IN
OUT
OFF
III
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 11 12
BT10L
ON
VIDEO
DIP SW FUNCTION TABLE
NO
FUNCTION
SW-ON
SW-OFF
1
INTERRUPT
ON
OFF
2
POSTFEED
ON
3
ASPECT
4:3
1:1
4
MEMORY
FRAME
FIELD
5
IMAGE
POSI
NEGA
6
MIRROR
NORM
REV
7
DIRECTION
8
9
SCAN
OFF
NORM
REV
______
WIDE 2
10
RESERVED
WIDE 1
______
NORM
______
11
INPUT
B&W
COLOR
12
75Ω
ON
AC IN
OFF
To
Hard Wired
Connection
RS-232C
Ext TV
In
Ext TV
Out
Camera &
TV Printer
In
Out
Video Out
Shutter
12Vdc
Foot Switch
for Camera
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.
Lower Accessory Panel
46-030370 REV 2
ACCESSORIES
8-9
8-4 Panasonic AG-5200/
AG-1260/AG-1270/
Sony SVO-1410
Basic Installation
Refer to the VCR Installation document for details.
8-4-1 System
Disassembly
1. Remove the front panel by removing five (5) screws.
• Three are located at the top of the front panel that attach it to the
bottom of the keyboard housing.
• The remaining two are located, one on the bottom right side and one
on the bottom left side of the front panel, behind two white rubber
hole plugs.
2. Remove the RF shield by removing eight (8) screws.
3. Gain access to the AC power strip by removing the front connector panel.
• Remove the four (4) screws, two on each side of the panel.
• Push in and slide the panel to the left.
• Pull it out as far as the wiring will permit and carefully lay it aside.
8-4-2 VCR Power
Hook-up
4. Locate the AC power terminal strip (see Illustration 8-4).
• In front is a black twelve (12) connection terminal strip.
THAT IS NOT IT!!!
• Look toward the back of the system, just below that 12 terminal block.
• Mounted on the back of the power supply bulkhead is a black six (6)
terminal block with three (3) wires attached to terminals 4, 5 and 6.
THIS IS THE ONE!!!
5. Remove the clear terminal strip shield. Connect AC pigtail cord for the
Panasonic AG-5200 as follows:
#4—Black Wire
#5—Green Wire
#6—White Wire
Connect Panasonic AG-5200/AG-1260/AG-1270/Sony SVO-1410 power
cord to pigtail.
8-4-3 System
Re-assembly
6. Replace the clear terminal strip cover. Route the AC power cord behind
the RF shield, up from the terminal strip to the top of the RF shield and
out the square notch.
7. Re-attach the front panel connector assembly (4 screws).
8. Replace the RF shield and secure it with the eight (8) screws.
9. Replace the front panel cover with the three screws on top and two
behind the white rubber covers.
10. Connect the video cable and remote shutter cable to the front accessory
panel.
8-10
ACCESSORIES
46-030370 REV 2
8-4-4 Mount and
Connect VCR
Mount the VCR to the accessory shelf with the hardware provided in the
installation kit.
Connect the video input/output from the VCR to the lower accessory panel
as shown in Illustration 8-7 (Panasonic AG-5200), Illustration 8-8 (Panasonic
AG-1260/AG-1270) or Illustration 8-9 (Sony SVO-1410).
Illustration 8-7
VCR Connection
Panasonic AG-5200
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
(VQL3019)
AUDIO IN
REMOTE
IN
ATTENTION
RISQUE DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
SERIAL
OUT
CH4
CH1(L)
CH2(R)
REAR
OUT
CH3
FRONT
SERIES PB
VHF
120V AC 50-60Hz
G0TB00219
S TE D
LI
FCC ID: ACJ9TCSTV007
Matsushita Electric Ind. Co.,Ltd.
Made in Japan
25W
VIDEO
Panasonic
AG-5200-P
IN
EQ
(VGN4989)
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
67
UIP
M EN T
(VGH2298-2)
AUDIO OUT
CH1(L)
UL
9F
Model No.
Serial No.
CH2(R)
AUTO PLAY
AUTO REPEAT
TIMER
OFF
TAPE
VIDEO
END OFF END
PLAY OFF REC
ON
MODE LOCK
OFF
ON
To AC
Pigtail or
Hard Wired
Connection
RS-232C
Ext TV
In
Ext TV
Out
Camera &
TV Printer
In
Out
Video Out
Shutter
12Vdc
Foot Switch
for Camera
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.
Lower Accessory Panel
46-030370 REV 2
ACCESSORIES
8-11
Illustration 8-8
VCR Connection
Panasonic AG-1260/AG-1270
IN FROM
ANT.
VHF/UHF
OUT TO TV
VIDEO
IN
OUT
CAUTION
Panasonic
AUDIO
IN
OUT
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER
B 2 S A 3 4 4 8 5
SERIAL NO.
2 . 1 9 . 1 9 9 2
RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK DO NOT OPEN
MFR’D
3 CH. 4
AG-1260-P
MODEL NO.
UL
®
120V AC
60HZ
19W
LISTED 679F
E72900
AVIS
FCC ID: ACJ927087AI
MADE IN JAPAN
RISQUE DE
CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS PUVRIR
(VGNS3239)
To AC
Pigtail or
Hard Wired
Connection
RS-232C
Ext TV
In
Ext TV
Out
Camera &
TV Printer
In
Out
Video Out
Shutter
12Vdc
Foot Switch
for Camera
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.
Lower Accessory Panel
8-12
ACCESSORIES
46-030370 REV 2
Illustration 8-9
VCR Connection
Sony SVO-1410
IN
ED
IN
IN
CONTROL S
SP
VERT. SYNC. ADJ.
SONY LABEL
IN
U
L
OUT
OUT
CH - 4
OUT
CH - 3
AUDIO
VIDEO
TV (OUT)
VHF/UHF
RF UNIT
To AC
Pigtail
BNC Angle Adapter
(46-233422P1)
BNC Angle Adapter
(46-233422P1)
Phono Plug to BNC
(46-285434P1)
Phono Plug to BNC
(46-285434P1)
TV Printer
12Vdc
In
Shutter
Out
Video Out
Accessory Well Connector Panel
46-030370 REV 2
ACCESSORIES
8-13
8-5 Connecting A MultiImage Camera
A multi-image camera can be connected to the RT 3200 Advantage - I
system. The camera can not be mounted to the system chassis, but can be
positioned close to the console and the camera video input connected to an
accessory panel.
The preferred video connection for a multi-image camera is the "EXT TVOUT" connection on the lower accessory panel. This is shown in Illustration
8-10.
Illustration 8-10
Camera Video Hook-up
Lower Accessory Panel
RS-232C
Ext TV
In
Ext TV
Out
Camera &
TV Printer
In
Out
Video Out
Shutter
12Vdc
Foot Switch
for Camera
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.
Connect Multi-Image Camera Video here
8-14
ACCESSORIES
46-030370 REV 2
8-5 Connecting A MultiImage Camera (continued)
If connection to the lower accessory panel is not possible, the multi-image
camera video can be connected to the upper accessory panel. You may use
either video output for the VCR or Page Printer on the upper panel. See
Illustration 8-11.
Illustration 8-11
Camera Hook-up
Upper Panel
Upper Accessory Panel
TV Printer
12Vdc
In
Shutter
Out
Video Out
Optional Camera Video Connections
46-030370 REV 2
ACCESSORIES
8-15
This page intentionally left blank.
8-16
ACCESSORIES
46-030370 REV 2
SECTION 9
APPENDICES
Control Parameters
Acoustic Level Notes
Cleaning and Inspecting
Troubleshooting
Maintenance
46-030370 REV 0
APPENDICES
9-1
This page intentionally left blank.
9-2
APPENDICES
46-030370 REV 0
APPENDIX A
CONTROL PARAMETERS
A-1 Control Parameters
The transmit acoustic power and intensity output of the imaging system is
related to various control settings which you can change during the course
of an exam. You should be aware of which controls affect output so you can
obtain the optimal image, while at the same time exposing the patient to only
minimum ultrasound energy.
A-2 Control Parameters
Which Affect Acoustic
Sound
The following parameters can affect acoustic output.
Focus
Changing the focus to optimize the image over a particular region of the scan
changes the depth at which the maximum intensities may occur. Typically,
the region of maximum intensity is close to the focal distance. Values
reported in Table A-1 represent the maximum intensity at one particular
focal depth. All other focus depths result in lower values.
M-Mode
Placing the machine into M-Mode affects the acoustic output of the system.
In M-Mode, repetitive pulse firings occur on the same scan line (corresponding to the M-Mode vector displayed) which increases the time-average of
SPTA intensity along the scan line chosen. The SPTA intensity is typically
increased by a factor of 30 to 60 times over that in B-Mode. In almost all
cases, the total output power and the pulse average intensities (i.e., SPPA
or Im) are not affected, even along the scan line chosen.
B/M-Mode
In this combination mode, both B- and M-Mode vectors are generated by the
machine. The SPTA intensity will be increased along the M-Mode line
selected, but typically not to the extent as when M-Mode alone is selected.
As with M-Mode, the SPPA, I-m and total power remain unchanged.
The SPPA and I-m intensities remain relatively constant, regardless of mode
selected. The SPPA intensity is strongly affected by mode selection, as a result
of more pulses being directed at the specific site selected. The SPTA intensity
is increased in M-Mode over B-Mode as shown in Table A-1.
46-030370 REV 0
CONTROL PARAMETERS
A-1
This page intentionally left blank.
A-2
CONTROL PARAMETERS
46-030370 REV 0
46-030370 REV 3
CONTROL PARAMETERS
A-3
Small Parts
General
OB &
Abdomen
General
OB
Biopsy
General
OB &
Abdomen
Intraoperative
Rectal
Small
Parts
Endocavitary
Type A
5.0 MHz
Focus: 2
Type B
3.5 MHz
Focus: 3
Type C
3.5 MHz
Focus: 3
Type D
3.5 MH
Focus: 3
Type E
5.0 MHz
Focus: 3
Type F
5.0 MHz
Focus: 3
Type G
5.0 MHz
Focus: 3
Type H
7.5 MHz
Focus: 3
Type MZ
6.5 MHz
Focus: 2
2D
M
2D
M
2D
M
2D
M
2D
M
2D
M
2D
M
2D
M
2D
M
Mode
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
PRF*
(kHz)
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
1.6
1.6
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.1
1.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
0.7
0.7
Power
(mW)
0.2 @ 4.0
5.9 @ 4.0
1.5 @ 2.8
92 @ 2.8
2.8 @ 6.1
67 @ 6.1
3.3 @ 5.8
78 @ 5.8
2.5 @ 6.2
94 @ 6.2
1.2 @ 5.8
30 @ 5.8
0.8 @ 6.5
32 @ 6.5
1.2 @ 6.5
32 @ 6.5
2.2 @ 3.1
42 @ 3.1
l-SPTA (mW/cm2)
@Depth z cm
7.3 @ 4.0
7.3 @ 4.0
135 @ 2.8
135 @ 2.8
64 @ 6.1
64 @ 6.1
83 @ 5.8
83 @ 5.8
89 @ 6.2
89 @ 6.2
22 @ 5.8
21 @ 5.8
20 @ 6.5
20 @ 6.5
20 @ 6.5
20 @ 6.5
42 @ 3.1
42 @ 3.1
I-SPPA W/cm2)
@Depth z cm
** NOTE: Figures shown are: 1) Measured in water 2) Maximum values by application
7.8 @ 4.0
7.8 @ 4.0
117 @ 2.8
117 @ 2.8
67 @ 6.1
67 @ 6.1
83 @ 5.8
83 @ 5.8
111 @ 6.2
111 @ 6.2
26 @ 5.8
26 @ 5.8
26 @ 6.5
26 @ 6.5
26 @ 6.5
26 @ 6.5
46 @ 3.1
46 @ 3.1
I-m (W/cm2)
@Depth z cm
1.6
1.6
3.1
3.1
5.9
5.9
4.7
4.7
4.7
4.7
9.3
9.3
24
24
22
22
4.4
4.4
20dB Beam
Area mm2
0.6
0.6
1.44
1.44
2.16
2.16
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.6
1.08
1.08
Entrance
Beam cm2
3) in situ value (Type CF) and 4) 6dB Beam Area mm2 (Type CF)
*PRF is the Pulse Repetition Frequency applicable for SPTA (Spatial Peak Temporal Average) case only.
Application
Probe
Table A-1
RT3200 Advantage - I Acoustic Levels
A-4
CONTROL PARAMETERS
46-030370 REV 3
2D
M
2D
M
2D
M
Abdomen
OB/GYN
Abdomen
OB/GYN
Abdomen
OB/GYN
Small parts
Breast
Type CB
3.5 MHz
Focus: 3
Type CC
3.5 MHz
Focus: 2
Type CK (CF) Abdomen
3.5 MHz
OB/GYN
Focus: 3
OB/GYN
Type CA
5.0 MHz
Focus: 3
Type CV
5.0 MHz
Focus: 2
Type LP
6.0Mhz
Focus: 2
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
0.015
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
PRF*
(kHz)
1.6
2.2
2.2
2.6
2.6
6.6
6.6
1.7
1.7
3
3
5
5
4.8
4.8
3
3
Power
(mW)
1.8 @ 4.2
129 @ 4.0
18.3 @ 4.0
2.1 @ 5.0
9.0 @ 5.0
1.2@5.1
41.7@5.1
.78@ 5.0
23.6 @ 4.9
3.1@ 4.4
48 @ 4.4
8.3 @ 4.9
30 @ 4.9
2.9 @ 3.6
70 @ 3.6
2 @ 2.6
90.6 @ 2.6
l-SPTA (mW/cm2)
@Depth z cm
100.1 @ 4.2
144.8 @ 4.0
132.6 @ 4.0
50.5 @ 5.0
50.5 @ 5.0
26.5@5.1
26.5@5.1
15.3 @ 4.9
15.3 @ 4.9
31 @ 4.4
31 @ 4.4
148 @ 4.9
148 @ 4.9
41.4 @ 3.6
41.4 @ 3.6
97 @ 2.6
97 @ 2.6
I-SPPA W/cm2)
@Depth z cm
** NOTE: Figures shown are: 1) Measured in water 2) Maximum values by application
110.6 @ 4.2
117.4 @ 4.0
113.7 @ 4.0
66.8 @ 5.0
66.8 @ 5.0
20 @ 4.9
20 @ 4.9
41 @ 4.4
41 @ 4.4
154 @ 4.9
154 @ 4.9
52.3 @ 3.6
52.3 @ 3.6
129.2 @ 2.6
129.2 @ 2.6
I-m (W/cm2)
@Depth z cm
137.4
137.4
7.25 **
7.25 **
53.4
53.4
18
18
7.8
7.8
20dB Beam
Area mm2
.64
.64
1.22
1.22
3.6
3.6
2.08
2.08
2.08
2.08
Entrance
Beam cm2
3) in situ value (Type CF) and 4) 6dB Beam Area mm2 (Type CF)
*PRF is the Pulse Repetition Frequency applicable for SPTA (Spatial Peak Temporal Average) case only.
B
M
B/M
2D
M
2D
M
2D
M
Abdomen
Urology
Type S
3.5 MHz
Focus: 2
2D
M
Mode
Endocavitary
Application
Type R
7.0 MHz
Focus: 2
Probe
Table A-1 (continued)
RT3200 Advantage - I Acoustic Levels
46-030370 REV 3
CONTROL PARAMETERS
A-5
Transrectal
Type RA
7.0 MHz
Focus: 2
2D
M
2D
M
Mode
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
PRF*
(kHz)
1.5
1.5
3
3
Power
(mW)
.5 @ 3.0
18.4 @ 3.0
2 @ 2.6
90.6 @ 2.6
l-SPTA (mW/cm2)
@Depth z cm
17.4 @ 3.0
17.4 @ 3.0
97 @ 2.6
97 @ 2.6
I-SPPA W/cm2)
@Depth z cm
** NOTE: Figures shown are: 1) Measured in water 2) Maximum values by application
33.9 @ 3.0
33.9 @ 3.0
129.2 @ 2.6
129.2 @ 2.6
I-m (W/cm2)
@Depth z cm
20dB Beam
Area mm2
Entrance
Beam cm2
3) in situ value (Type CF) and 4) 6dB Beam Area mm2 (Type CF)
*PRF is the Pulse Repetition Frequency applicable for SPTA (Spatial Peak Temporal Average) case only.
Type ATF/ATV Transvaginal
5.0 MHz
Focus: 2
Application
Probe
Table A-1 (continued)
RT3200 Advantage - I Acoustic Levels
This page intentionally left blank.
A-6
CONTROL PARAMETERS
46-030370 REV 3
APPENDIX B
ACOUSTIC LEVEL NOTES
B-1 Acoustic Level Notes
1.
System Acoustic Power Control set at 100%, with system parameters
adjusted to maximize individual intensities.
2.
Intensities and focal areas measured in water at locations which
correspond to maximized normalized (in-situ) intensities.
3.
The water values can be converted to normalized (in-situ) values by
using the following formula:
It = Iwe-0.23a´fz
where:
It = in-situ intensity
Iw = measured water intensity
e = appx. 2.7183
a´ = tissue attenuation (0.3dB/MHz/cm)
f = Ultrasonic center frequency (MHz)
z = ultrasound path length (one-way)(cm)
4.
In-situ intensity values remain below FDA specified pre-enactment
values for applicable clinic applications for all control settings.
5.
20dB Beam Area represents the 2-dB two-way beam area of a single
vector measured at the depth of maximum SPTA intensity.
6.
Beam Entrance Area represents the area at the surface of the transducer emitting one acoustic vector. For sector scanners, this is also the
active acoustic area in contact with the patient.
B-2 Measurement Basis for
Probe Output
Acoustic Power (milliwatts)
Probe acoustic power output is determined by measuring the force exerted
on an absorbing target by the acoustic radiation field with a force
microbalance.
Acoustic Intensity
(milliwatts/cm2 or watts/cm2)
Probe acoustic intensity levels are determined using a calibrated
(milliwatts/cm2 or watts/cm2) PVDF miniature hydrophone.
46-030370 REV 0
ACOUSTIC LEVEL NOTES
B-1
This page intentionally left blank.
B-2
ACOUSTIC LEVEL NOTES
46-030370 REV 0
APPENDIX C
CLEANING AND INSPECTING
C-1 Overview
C-2
Probe Cleaning
This section explains how to clean and disinfect the probes and how to clean
the console, monitor, video cassette recorder, printer and multi imaging
device surfaces. It also provides a checklist for monthly system inspections.
Before cleaning the probes, refer to the caution, cleaning and
disinfection instructions in the probe box.
•
After each use, disconnect the probe from the ultrasound console and
remove coupling gel from the transducer by wiping with a soft cloth and
rinse with flowing water.
•
Wash the probe surface with mild soap in lukewarm water. Scrub the
probe as needed using a soft sponge, gauze or cloth to remove all visible
residue from the probe surface Prolonged soaking or scrubbing with a
soft bristle brush (such as a toothbrush) may be necessary if material
has dried onto the probe surface.
•
Rinse the probe with enough clean, potable water to remove all visible
soap residue.
•
Air dry or dry with a soft cloth.
Special Cleaning Instructions for the MZ probe: When cleaning the MZ
probe, it is important to be sure that all surfaces are thoroughly cleaned. This
probe has an adjustable two-part handle that must be disassembled to gain
access to all surfaces. To disassemble the handle, completely remove the
handle adjustment screw located mid-way between the cable entry and
probe tip. The two handle halves and adjustment screw must be thoroughly
cleaned along with the main probe shaft as described earlier. After rinsing
and drying is completed, the probe handle can be loosely reassembled for
the disinfection process.
WARNING
46-030370 REV 2
3
Ultrasound transducers can easily be damaged by improper handling.
Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment
damage.
•
Do not immerse the probe into any liquid beyond the level indicated by
the immersion level diagram in Illustration C-1.
•
Never immerse the transducer connector or probe adapters into any
liquid.
•
Avoid mechanical shock or impact to the transducer.
CLEANING AND INSPECTING
C-1
C-2
Probe Cleaning (cont'd)
•
Transducer damage can result from contact with inappropriate coupling
or cleaning agents.
¤
¤
¤
C-3
Do not soak or saturate transducers with solutions containing
alcohol, bleach or hydrogen peroxide.
Avoid contact with solutions or coupling gels containing mineral oil
or lanolin.
Avoid temperatures above 60°C.
•
Inspect the transducer prior to each use for damage or degradation to
the housing, cable, strain relief, lens and seal.
•
Do not use a damaged or defective transducer.
Disinfection
Perform the cleaning instructions in Section C-2 before following the
disinfection procedures.
•
Properly immerse the probe in a suitable commercial germicide. Use an
EPA registered germicide intended for use on plastic medical instruments. Follow the germicide manufacturer's instructions regarding
concentration, time of contact, storage and disposal.
•
2% Glutaraldehyde type solutions without surfactants are recommended.
Cidex is the only germicide that has been tested to be safe and compatible
with the materials used in the construction of the probes.
•
Follow the germicide manufacturer's instructions for rinsing after removal
from the germicide.
Special Disinfecting Instructions for the MZ Probe: After proper cleaning, to
properly disinfect the MZ probe, the probe handle can be reassembled
loosely so that the entire probe with handle can be immersed in the
germicide solution. The adjustment screw must be kept loose so that
germicide can penetrate to all surfaces. After immersing, rotate and shake
the probe while it is below the surface of the germicide to eliminate air
pockets. Allow the germicide to remain in contact with the fully immersed
probe, for high-level disinfection, according to the germicide manufacturer's
recommended time. To remove all germicide residue, final rinsing should
be done following the germicide's manufacturer's instructions. Remove
excess water by shaking and allow to air dry.
C-2
CLEANING AND INSPECTING
3
46-030370 REV 2
C-4
Gas Sterilization
Perform the cleaning instructions in Section C-2 before following the gas
sterilization procedures.
•
If necessary, ethylene oxide or formalin gas sterilization process may be
used on surgical and biopsy probes only.
•
Follow the instructions, recommendations and precautions provided by
the manufacturer of the sterilization equipment and gas supplier.
•
To avoid probe damage, do not use process cycles that exceed 60°C or
pressures that vary from normal atmosphere.
Adequate cleaning and disinfection is necessary to prevent disease
transmission. Use probe sheaths whenever possible. It is the responsibility of the equipment user to verify and maintain the effectiveness
of the infection control procedures in use.
46-030370 REV 2
3
CLEANING AND INSPECTING
C-3
Illustration C-1
Probe Cleaning
Do not dip the probe beyond the level indicated.
➨
Type B Probe
➨
Type A Probe
Aperture
Aperture
Type D Probe
➨
Type C Probe
➨
Aperture
Type F Probe
➨
Type E Probe
Aperture
Aperture
Aperture
C-4
CLEANING AND INSPECTING
➨
3
46-030370 REV 2
Illustration C-1
Probe Cleaning (continued)
Do not dip the probe beyond the level indicated.
Type G Probe
Type CC (Convex) Probe
Drain (Out)
➨
Drain (In)
Aperture
➨
Aperture
➨
➨
Aperture
Type LP Probe
46-030370 REV 2
3
Type H Probe
Aperture
Aperture
Type S Probe
➨
➨
Type CA, CB (Convex) Probe
Aperture
CLEANING AND INSPECTING
C-5
Illustration C-1
Probe Cleaning (continued)
Do not dip the probe beyond the level indicated.
Type R Probe
Type MZ Probe
Type SV, TV (Convex) Probe
Aperture
Aperture
Aperture
Type ATV, ATF (straight handle ONLY) Probe
Type CK (CF) Probe
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
Type RA Probe
Aperture
Aperture
➨
Aperture
Aperture
C-6
CLEANING AND INSPECTING
3
46-030370 REV 2
C-5 System Cleaning
C-5-1 Console Surfaces
We suggest a schedule of cleaning for the console and the monitors. The
image screen monitor and the operator console are the most likely to
accumulate dust and grime.
Use a mild general purpose non-abrasive soap and water solution and a
folded cloth. Wipe down the top, front (including the keys), back, and both
sides of the console.
C-5-2 Monitor Face and
Filter
Remove the filter as shown in Illustration C-2.
Illustration C-2
Filter Removal
2
1
1
Filter
Clamps
2
(1)
(2)
Slide the filter clamps outwards.
Pull the filter clamps out.
Use a soft, folded cloth and a glass cleaner solution. Apply the glass cleaner
to the cloth and then gently wipe the monitor face.
NOTE: Do not use a glass cleaner that has a hydrocarbon base (such as
Benzene, Methyl Alcohol or Methyl Ethyl Ketone) on monitors with an antiglare shield. Prolonged use of such cleaners will damage the anti-glare
shield. Hard rubbing will also damage the shield.
After cleaning the monitor face and filter, re-install the filter on the monitor.
Insert the filter clamps and slide them inwards securely. Refer to
Illustration C-2.
NOTE: Make sure that the filter is securely fixed by the filter clamps. It is
important to prevent hte falling hazard of the filter. A click sound will be heard
when the filter clamp is secured by the locking mechanism.
46-030370 REV 2
3
CLEANING AND INSPECTING
C-7
C-5-3 Video Cassette
Recorder
C-5-4 Multi-Imaging
Device
C-5-5 Page Printer
Turn off the RT 3200 Advantage - I before cleaning the VCR.
Wipe the external surfaces of the unit with a clean, dry cloth. Do not use a
wet cloth or any cleaning fluid because it may enter and damage the unit.
Clean the record and playback heads with a soft, non-abrasive cleaning
system.
Unplug the RT 3200 Advantage - I before cleaning the Multi-Imaging Device.
Use a mild, general purpose, non-abrasive soap and water solution and
folded cloth. Wipe down the top, front, back, and both sides of the unit.
Turn off the RT 3200 Advantage - I before cleaning the Printer.
Use a soft, folded cloth. Remove stubborn stains with a cloth lightly
dampened with a mild detergent solution.
Never use strong solvents, such as thinner or benzine, or abrasive cleansers
because they will damage the cabinet.
No further maintenance, such as lubrication, is required.
If you have printer problems, refer to Appendix D - Troubleshooting or
contact your GE service representative.
C-6 Monthly Inspection
Electrical
Hazard
To avoid electrical shock hazard, do not remove panels or covers from
console. This servicing must be performed by qualified service
personnel.
•
•
•
Examine connectors on cables for any mechanical defects.
Examine entire length of cable for cuts or abrasions.
Examine equipment for loose or missing hardware.
If you find any defects or malfunctions, do not operate the equipment.
Inform qualified service person. Contact a General Electric Service Representative for information.
C-8
CLEANING AND INSPECTING
3
46-030370 REV 2
APPENDIX D
TROUBLESHOOTING
D-1 Overview
This section supplies two tables to help you trace the causes of some
display and printing problems.
D-2 Troubleshooting the
RT 3200 Advantage - I
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
When power is switched
ON, nothing appears on
the monitor.
Power cable may be disconnected from the socket.
Connect power cable or
use different wall
receptacle.
The power fuse may be
blown.
Turn off power switch.
Replace fuse. Extra
fuses are with the
accessories.
The front panel
<FREEZE> key may be
on.
Check position of the
<FREEZE> key.
Brightness and Contrast
may be misadjusted.
Readjust the Brightness
and Contrast.
Dark vertical stripes appear on the image.
Particles may be stuck to
the surface of the probe.
Clean the surface of the
probe.
Many blinking dots of
noise appear on the image.
Other ultrasonic units may
be in use near the RT 3200.
Move the ultrasonic units
away from the RT 3200.
There may be high-frequency noise sources near
the RT 3200.
Use an alternate wall receptacle.
No image appears on the
monitor.
Move the RT 3200 away
from the noise sources.
Wavering image on the
display screen.
No scanned image when
probe is placed on patient.
Equipment generating
strong magnetic field may
be near the RT 3200.
Move the source of the
noise away from the RT
3200.
The Gain control may be
at 0dB.
Increase the Gain.
Selected wrong probe.
Depress probe select.
If necessary, contact a GE Service Representative or an Authorized
International Distributor.
General Electric Company
Medical Systems Group
GE Cares (Service): (800) 437-1171
Accessories: (800) 433-5566 or (414) 524-5140
Customer Answer Center: (800) 543-9018 or (414) 647-4420
46-030370 REV 0
TROUBLESHOOTING
D-1
D-3 Troubleshooting the
Page Printer
D-2
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
Moisture condensation.
A heater was turned on
OR
Room humidity suddenly
rose
OR
Printer was abruptly
moved from a cold place
to a warmer one.
Let the unit dry out for 1-2
hours
OR
Gradually raise the
temperature until
moisture evaporates.
THEN
Press the Feed button
while gently pulling on
the edge of paper so it
feeds through smoothly.
Paper is jammed.
Moisture condensation
OR
Paper inserted crooked.
1. Raise the Head Set
lever to OFF.
2. Carefully remove the
stuck paper by hand.
(Do not use pointed
devices. They may
damage the printing
head or the rear
surfaces of the platen.)
3. Make sure there are no
creases in the paper.
4. Insert the paper straight
into the platen.
Printer head is dirty.
After printing 2-3 rolls of
paper, dust and grime collected on the head.
1. Following the Paper
Loading procedure, insert the supplied Head
Cleaning Sheet.
2. Turn the Head Set Lever ON.
3. Pull the cleaning sheet
paper edge strongly.
4. Repeat steps 1-3, if necessary
After printing almost totally
black pictures, white prints
turn black.
The printer has printed 20
or more almost totally black
pictures.
Switch the Posi/Nega selector to the opposite position for a while.
After printing almost totally
black picture, the subsequent prints became faint.
The printer has printed
dozens of almost totally
black pictures. A protective circuit is preventing the
head from overheating.
Stop printing for a while.
When the temperature of
the printing head drops
back to normal, printing
resumes.
Images come out black or
white.
Contrast/Brightness
misadjusted.
Check Contrast/Brightness. Adjust if necessary.
Alphanumerics are blurry.
Field/Frame switch
misadjusted.
Adjust Field/Frame switch
to Frame position.
TROUBLESHOOTING
46-030370 REV 0
APPENDIX E
MAINTENANCE
E-1 Check-up and Service
Regular maintenance is necessary for safe and trouble free use of the unit.
Please perform these daily, weekly and monthly maintenance instructions.
DAILY CHECK LIST
•
Clean the ultrasound gel from each probe after each use.
•
Clean the display monitor. Use a soft, slightly moistened cloth. If the
monitor is still soiled, use a slightly moistened cloth with detergent.
Then clean with a soft cloth.
•
Check the power cable for cracks or deterioration.
WEEKLY CHECK LIST
•
Check probes for damages.
•
Check electrical cables.
•
Clean around the unit.
MONTHLY CHECK LIST
E-2 How to Store the Unit
46-030370 REV 0
•
Visually inspect the unit every month. If any damage is found, contact
your GE Service Representative.
•
Check the mechanical connections or keyboard problems.
•
Check the casters for proper locking operation.
•
Clean the VTR record and playheads in order to obtain good-quality
pictures. Use a non-abrasive VTR cleaning system approved by the
VTR manufacturer.
•
Clean the page printer, Camera, and display monitor.
•
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the unit from the AC
receptacle.
•
Position the unit and lock the front castors.
•
Cover the unit.
MAINTENANCE
E-1
To avoid injury by tipping over, SET THE MONITOR TO THE LOWEST POSITION BEFORE MOVING.
Pour éviter ie basculement accidentel de la machine, BAISSER LE MONITEUR AVANT DÉPLACEMENT.
Um bei bewegung des Gerätes Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, STELLEN SIE DEN MONITOR AUF
DIE NIEDRIGSTE POSITION EIN.
PREDISPORRE IL MONITOR NELLA POSIZIONE PIU BASSA PRIMA DI MUOVERE la macchina per
evitare rischi di rottura.
Para evitar daños por voltearse el sistema, POSICIONE EL MONITOR A SU NIVEL MÁS BAJO ANTES
DE MOVER EL SISTEMA.
!
To avoid injury by tipping over, DO NOT PUSH THIS UNIT FROM THE SIDES.
Pour éviter ie basculement accidentel de la machine, NE PAS LA POUSSER PAR LE CÔTÉ.
Um bei bewegung des Gerätes Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, SCHIEBEN SIE DEN
MONITOR NICHT VON DER SEITE.
Per evitare rischi di rottura, NON SPINGERE LA MACCHINA DI LATO.
Para evitar daños por voltearse el sistema, NO MUEVA EL SISTEMA DESDE LOS LADOS.
E-3 How to Move a Unit
E-2
MAINTENANCE
It is easy to move the RT 3200 Advantage - I because the page printer, VTR
or camera options are integrated into the system.
46-030370 REV 0
E-3 How to Move a Unit
(continued)
Before moving the unit:
•
Make sure that the probe holder is fixed and probes are properly stored.
•
Securely place the power cord and accessory cables around the rear
handle.
•
Check to insure the wheels are unlocked.
•
Make sure monitor height adjustment is in its lowest possible position.
E-4 Monitor Preparation and
Installation
1. Unpack the monitor from its shipping box.
2. On the monitor, remove the one slotted screw on the bottom, center front
of the monitor. Remove the small section of the shell from the bottom
of the monitor housing.
3. On the RT 3200 Advantage - I system monitor neck, pull the small white
rubber plug from the mount on the monitor neck and unscrew the swivel
limit screw enough to mount the monitor.
Route the monitor connector cable out the slot in the monitor.
4. Place the monitor on the monitor neck, aligning the slots and insuring
that no cables are pinched.
5. Screw in the swivel limit screw on the side of the monitor neck to secure
the monitor. Replace the small white rubber cover.
6. Connect the keyed monitor power and video plug.
Carefully check the swivel action of the monitor. Insure no cables are
binding.
7. Replace the small shell plate on the bottom of the monitor housing and
secure it with the slotted screw.
8. Turn on the RT 3200 Advantage - I system and verify monitor operation.
46-030370 REV 0
MAINTENANCE
E-3
E-5 Removing the Monitor
Reverse the monitor installation procedure in order to remove the monitor
from the system for shipment.
The monitor should be securely packed in its original box or equivalent.
CAUTION
Without the weight of the monitor in the gas shock, the monitor height
adjustment moves very rapidly.
Do not place any objects or your body in the path of the monitor
pedestal, if the monitor adjustment is activated, without the monitor
attached.
E-4
MAINTENANCE
46-030370 REV 0
SECTION 10
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
Overview
Ellipse Measurement Function
HIP Dysplasia Calculation
EFBW—Third Calculation
Gestational Summary Report Page
Report Page Sequencing
Measurement Averaging Page
Anatomical Survey Report Page
User Programmable Comments Library
Urology Summary Report Page
Record Output —Line Printer
Prostate Body Marker Patterns
Calc 3
Cine Memory Operation (OPTION)
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-1
This page intentionally left blank.
10-2
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
SECTION 10
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-1 Overview
Please take some time to browse through this section. It describes the many
time saving and income generating features available with the RT 3200
Advantage - III upgrade. Contact your GE Ultrasound Sales Representative
concerning how these features can be added to your system.
The "Ellipse Measurement Function" provides a quick, easy way to measure
circumferences and areas. It speeds up the measurement of head and
abdominal circumferences by offering an option to the trace method.
The "HIP Dysplasia Calculation" provides a method to evaluate the development of the infant hip.
A "Third EFBW Calculation" uses femur length, head and abdominal
circumferences to estimate fetal birth weight. This provides a good crosscheck with the other two EFBW calculations.
The "Gestational or Obstetrical Summary Report" provides a quick, easy
and accurate summary of all designated OB measurements taken during an
exam. From the measurements taken, calculations such as Cephalic Index,
EFBW, AFI and Composite Gestational Age are displayed. Patient information in the heading, comments and a space for the physicians signature
supply a concise summary for the patients records or the referring physician.
The "Measurement Averaging Page" allows you to average multiple measurement types for the Gestational Summary Report. It also allows easy
editing of measurement errors that may be out of range.
The "Anatomical Survey Report Page" provides a list of anatomy, normally
imaged with selections, to designate a normal or abnormal appearance.
Patient information in the heading, along with the comments section,
provides an excellent summary for patient records or the referring physician.
The "User Programmable Comments Library" provides a productivity feature that saves time when annotating a scan image or inputting frequently
used comments into a report.
The "Urology Report Page" provides a summary specific to an urology exam
with PPSA calculation.
The "Prostate Body Marker Patterns" have been added to facilitate the
urology exam. Both inverted and non-inverted prostate patterns can
illustrate the exact probe location.
Calc 3 provides GYN and IVF calculations that are entered on the GYN and
IVF Report Pages.
32 frame Cine Memory option capabilities.
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-3
10-2 Ellipse Measurement
Function
An ellipse measurement function has been provided in order to improve the
measurement of head and abdominal circumferences and areas.
The ellipse function supersedes any prior measurements on the screen.
Entering the ellipse mode clears all measurements, calipers and traces just
as it would when you press the OFF key.
Trace
Area
Dist
Press the DIST key, then press the TRACE/AREA key. Both the DIST and
TRACE/AREA LEDs will light and the highlighted
cursor will appear
on the screen.
NOTE:
Pressing DIST or TRACE/AREA keys at any time before the
completion of this sequence will exit the ellipse mode and
remove any ellipse graphics from the display.
▼
T. B.
Use the TRACKBALL to position the
cursor at one end of the transverse axis of the ellipse. (i.e. BPD for HC or TAD for AC)
▼
Set
▼
T. B.
Press SET. A second
cursor will appear.
Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "+" cursor to the opposite
end of the transverse axis.
▼
Press SET. The ellipse graphic will appear with a 1:1 Aspect Ratio (a circle).
Set
NOTE:
The transverse diameter is between the two "+" cursors. The
sagittal diameter is between the two "x" cursors. The
highlighted "x" cursor is now active.
▼
T. B.
Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "x" cursor to the upper end
of the sagittal axis.
▼
Set
Press SET. The highlighted "x" cursor is now active.
▼
T. B.
Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "x" cursor to the lower end
of the sagittal axis.
▼
(continued)
10-4
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-2 Ellipse Measurement
Function (continued)
▼
Press SET. The original "+" cursor is now active.
Set
NOTE: Each time you press SET, the cursors will become alternately
active. You may make adjustments to the ellipse as you desire.
The highlighted cursor is the active cursor.
▼
When you are satisfied with the ellipse, press MEAS to complete the
measurement.
Meas
The two diameters, circumference and the area will be displayed in their
respective fields on the left-hand side of the display screen.
This measurement may be used in OB TBL 1 (AC and HC). It may also be
used in user programmable OB TBL 2 menu levels 4 and 5.
▼
OB
Tbl 1
or
OB
Tbl 2
▼
For gestational age estimations after making an ellipse measurement,
select the function (OB TBL 1 or 2).
Select the menu level and press ENTER.
Enter
Illustration 10-1
Ellipse Measurement
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
12 : 10 : 05
CA 5MHz
1.0
D+
39
X
42
X
X
C+
127
X
X
X
A+ 12.86
X
X
X
G68D54T60
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
GE
10-5
10-3 HIP Dysplasia
Calculation
The HIP calculation is provided to assist in assessing the development of the
infant hip. In this calculation three straight lines are superimposed on the
image and aligned with the anatomical features. The two angles are
computed, displayed and can be used by the physician in making a
diagnosis.
The three lines are:
1. The Baseline connects the osseous acetabulum convexity to the
point where the joint capsule and the perichondrium unite with the
disc bone.
2. The inclination line connects the osseous convexity to the labrum
acetabulare.
3. The Acetabulum roof line connects the lower edge of the osileum
to the osseous convexity.
Illustration 10-2
Hip Dysplasia Calculation
∝
3
2
β
1
The Angle ∝ (Alpha) is the supplement of the angle between lines 1 and 3.
It characterizes the osseous convexity. The angle β (Beta) is the angle
between lines 1 and 2. It characterizes the bone supplementing additional
roofing by the cartilaginous convexity.
10-6
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-3 HIP Dysplasia
Calculation (continued)
The HIP Dysplasia calculation is used as follows:
Calc 2
Freeze the image and press CALC 2.
▼
Use the ARROW key to select HIP.
1 EDC
2 EFBW
3 AFI
4 HIP
▼
Enter
▼Rotation
T.B.
▼
Set
Press ENTER and line #1 will appear on the screen. Note that the line is
about 8 cm with a small gap to mark the center of the line. At one end will
be the number "1".
Position line #1 using the TRACKBALL and the ROTATION knob. Position
the line as the baseline.
Press SET. Line #2 will appear on the screen. This line looks like #1 but has
a "2" labeled at one end of it. The Greek letter β (Beta) will appear halfway
between the labeled ends of lines 1 and 2, and the angle will be 55 degrees.
On the left hand side of the screen the results of angles ∝ and β will appear.
▼Rotation
Use the TRACKBALL and ROTATION KNOB to position Line #2.
T.B.
▼
Set
▼Rotation
T.B.
When you are satisfied with the position of line #2, press SET. Line #3 will
appear. The Greek letter ∝ will appear halfway between lines 1 and 3 and
the angle will be 60˚.
Use the TRACKBALL and ROTATION KNOB to position line #3 as the
Acetabulum Roof Line.
▼
(continued)
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-7
10-3 HIP Dysplasia
Calculation (continued)
▼
Set
▼Rotation
If you are not satisfied with any of the three line placements, you can
reactivate each line by pressing SET.
Use the TRACKBALL and ROTATION KNOB to readjust the active line.
T.B.
▼
Meas
When you are satisfied with the measurement and positions of the lines,
press MEAS.
This ends the hip dysplasia mode calculations and stores the results on the
display for recording.
▼
Press OFF to erase all measurements and measurement graphics.
Off
10-8
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-4 Estimated Fetal Body
Weight —Third
Calculation
When EFBW is selected from the Calc 2 function, EFBW calculations will be
displayed for three possible fetal body weights. The EFBW's will be labeled
#1, #2, #3.
Four lines will appear in the text scroll area on the left side of the display. It
will be formatted as shown below.
EFBW:
#1
#2
#3
9999
9999
9999
To display estimated fetal body weight:
DISPLAY
1
Calc 2
▼
EDC
2
EFBW
3
AFI
4 HIP
2
EFBW
3
AFI
4 HIP
Press CALC 2.
1
EDC
Use the ARROW key to select "EFBW".
▼
Enter
46-030370 REV 3
Press ENTER. EFBW calculations will be displayed on the lower left portion
of the display.
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-9
10-5 Gestational Summary
Report Page
10-5-1 Overview
This section describes how to display, edit, and print a hardcopy of the
Gestational Report Page. It also explains dependent and independent data
fields, gestational age error markers and gestational age estimation.
Illustration 10-3
Gestational Report Page
EXAM DATE:
NAME:
ID:
REFERRAL:
REFERRED FOR:
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
AGE:
LMP:
GESTATIONAL AGE
GA BY LMP:
BPD(HADLOCK)
OFD
CRL(ROBINSON)
FL(O BRIEN)
HC(HADLOCK)
TAD
APD
AC(HADLOCK)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
CGA:
COMMENTS:
REPORTED BY:
10-10
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
04/15/91
GRAVIDA:
PARA:
CALCULATIONS
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CEPHALIC INDEX:
FL/BPD:
FL/AC:
HC/AC:
EFBW:
#1 (BPD,AC):
#2 (FL,AC):
#3 (FL,AC,HC):
HEART RATE:
AFI:
/
%
%
%
%
GM
GM
GM
BPM
CM
%
EDD BY LMP:
EDD BY CGA:
REPORT DATE:
46-030370 REV 3
10-5-2 Displaying and
Exiting the
Report Page
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
O
G
CONTROL : G ___
GESTATIONAL DATA/
or
CONTROL : O ____
OBSTETRICAL REPORT
▼
CONTROL : GR ___
GESTATIONAL DATA/REPORT PAGE
R
▼
Enter
Displays the report page on the image screen. The keyboard responds
to editing commands.
▼
Exits the report page. Returns to normal ultrasound display.
Control
10-5-3 Editing the
Report Page
The report page contains 17 edit fields. You edit the fields by entering
characters at the position marked by the alphanumeric cursor (a blinking
underscore). The characters you enter replace (type over) existing characters. You cannot insert characters into a field and shift characters to the right
of the cursor.
The RT 3200 checks numerical and data fields for validity when you move
the cursor to another field. If you enter illegal data, the RT3200 beeps and
the cursor remains in the offending field.
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-11
10-5-3 Editing the
Report Page
(continued)
Controlling Cursor Motion
Use the following keyboard keys or the TRACKBALL to move the cursor as
you edit a report page:
T.B.
Shift
O
Shift
.
Shift
L
Shift
K
BS
Return
Press Shift, O (
preceding field.
) to move the cursor to the first character position in the
Press Shift . (period) ( ) to move the cursor to the first character position
in the next field. If the cursor is already in the last field on the page
(Comment Line 3), it will need to be moved with the TRACKBALL or the
Shift, O ( ) key.
Press Shift, L (
) to move the cursor to the right one character position.
If the cursor is already at the last character position of the present field, the
cursor will advance to the first position of the next field.
Press Shift, K (
) to move the cursor to the left one character position.
If the cursor is already at the first character position of the present field, it will
move to the first position of the prior field.
Press BS (Backspace) to erase the character to the left of the cursor and
move the cursor to the left one position. If the cursor is already at the
beginning of the current field, the BS key has no effect
The RETURN key works the same as the Shift . (period) (
) key.
Press any other alphanumeric keyboard key to enter a character into the
field at the cursor and move the cursor to the right one position. If the cursor
is already at the last character position of the present field, it will advance to
the first position of the next field.
10-12
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-5-4 Edit Fields
Any of the 18 report page edit fields described below can be edited.
Illustration 10-4
Edit Fields
EXAM DATE:
NAME:
ID:
REFERRAL: DR. J. DOE
REFERRED FOR: TWINS
04/15/91
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
AGE: 32
LMP: 04/15/91
GRAVIDA: 2
PARA: 2
GESTATIONAL AGE
CALCULATIONS
GA BY LMP:
BPD(HADLOCK)
OFD
CRL(ROBINSON)
FL(O BRIEN)
HC(HADLOCK)
TAD
APD
AC(HADLOCK)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
CGA:
CEPHALIC INDEX:
FL/BPD:
FL/AC:
HC/AC:
EFBW:
#1 (BPD,AC):
#2 (FL,AC):
#3 (FL,AC,HC):
HEART RATE:
AFI:
/
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
%
%
%
%
GM
GM
GM
BPM
cm
%
EDD BY LMP:
EDD BY CGA:
COMMENTS: TYPE IN THREE LINES OF COMMENTS HERE.
REPORTED BY:
REPORT DATE:
Referral
Enter the name of the referring physician, up to 16 characters long.
Referred for
Enter the reason for referral, up to 36 characters long.
Patient Age
Enter the age of the patient, using any two-digit integer. The number is used
only for presentation on the summary page. If you enter zero, the field
display is blank.
Last Menstrual Period (LMP)
Enter the date from the first day of the patient's last menstrual period prior
to pregnancy. Enter the date as: month (two digits), slash, day (two digits),
slash, year (in 2 or 4 digit format).
NOTE: Years 70-99 are interpreted as 1970-1999 and 00-69 are
interpreted as 2000-2069. If you use the four-digit format, the
system ignores the first two digits of the year.
EGA
Enter the estimated gestational age at the time of the examination. Enter the
weeks (two digits), followed by the letter "W", the days (one digit), followed
by the letter "D", i.e. 14W2D. This data is used to calculate the estimated
delivery date by EGA.
The formula used is: EDD by EGA = current date + (40 weeks - EGA)
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-13
10-5-4 Edit Fields
(continued)
Gravida
Para
[Include BPD in] CGA?
[Include CRL in] CGA?
[Include FL in] CGA?
[Include HC in] CGA?
[Include AC in] CGA?
[Include (5) User Programmable Tables in] CGA?
Enter the number of pregnancies of the patient. This number may be any
integer, and is used only for presentation on the summary page. If you enter
zero, the field display is blank.
Enter the number of deliveries of the patient, using any two-digit integer. The
number is used only for presentation on the summary page. If you enter
zero, the field display is blank.
These ten flags specify which gestational ages should be used to calculate
the Composite Gestation Age (CGA). Enter one of the three characters:
Y
N
D
Include this GA in the CGA.
Do not include this GA in the CGA.
Delete this GA measurement from the summary page. This
response clears the result fields (millimeters and GA) and loses the
measurement data and any ratio calculations involved.
NOTE: "N" shows up by factory default if no measurements have been
entered.
"Y" automatically replaces "N" once a measurement has been
entered.
Selecting "D" is reversible if the measurement has not been
deleted from the averaging page.
Comments (line 1)
Comments (line 2)
Comments (line 3)
10-14
Three lines of comments can be entered, each containing up to 64
alphanumeric characters.
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-5-5 Independent Data
Fields
The independent data fields hold the key measurement data. These fields
are not affected by any editing function in the report page display (except that
you can delete gestational age measurement data from the report page).
Illustration 10-5
Independent Data Fields
EXAM DATE:
NAME: JANE DOE
ID: 123-45-6789
REFERRAL:
REFERRED FOR:
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
GESTATIONAL AGE
GA BY LMP:
BPD(HADLOCK)
OFD
CRL(ROBINSON)
FL(O BRIEN)
HC(HADLOCK)
TAD
APD
AC(HADLOCK)
TEST1 (TBL 2)
TEST2 (TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
CGA:
04/15/91
AGE:
LMP:
GRAVIDA:
PARA:
CALCULATIONS
52mm
75mm
22mm
38mm
171mm
21W6D
CGA? Y
09W0D
21W3D
19W3D
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
139mm
52mm
75mm
19W0D
20W4D
21W1D
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
18W1D
CEPHALIC INDEX:
FL/BPD:
FL/AC:
HC/AC:
EFBW:
#1 (BPD,AC):
#2 (FL,AC):
#3 (FL,AC,HC,):
HEART RATE:
AFI:
52 / 75
70%
73%
27%
123%
364GM
375GM
GM
125BPM
180CM
70%
EDD BY LMP:
EDD BY CGA:
COMMENTS:
REPORTED BY:
REPORT DATE:
Hospital Name
The hospital name is the same sixteen characters appearing in the upper left
corner of the B-Mode display. Use the CONTROL, H function to enter the
hospital name.
Patient Name
Use the ID/NAME key to enter the patient name.
Patient ID
Use the ID/NAME key to enter a patient identification number.
Exam Date
The exam date on the report page is the date on the system clock.
BPD, mm
GA by BPD
BPD Table Author
BPD is the biparietal diameter last measured. GA by BPD is the gestational
age computed from the last biparietal diameter or averaged. BPD Table
Author is the author of the table used in the gestational age computation.
The GA by BPD may be estimated using OB TBL 1, menu level 1, or the user
programmed OB TBL 2, menu level 1, 2, or 3.
The author field will show Hadlock for OB TBL 1, or the user programmed
title from OB TBL 2.
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-15
10-5-5 Independent Data
Fields (continued)
OFD
CRL, mm
GA by CRL
CRL Table Author
OFD is the occipital-frontal diameter. It is obtained if a head circumference
is measured by the two-diameter method. The OFD is the second distance
measured.
CRL is the crown-lump length last measured. GA by CRL is the gestational
age computed from the last crown-rump length or averaged. CRL Table
Author is the author of the table used in the gestational age computation.
The GA by CRL may be estimated using OB TBL 1, menu level 2, or the
user programmed OB TBL 2, menu level 1, 2, or 3.
The author field will show Robinson for OB TBL 1 or the user programmed
title from OB TBL 2.
FL. mm
GA by FL
FL Table Author
FL is the femur length last measured. GA by FL is the gestational age
computed from the last femur length or averaged. FL Table Author is the
author of the table used in the gestational age computation.
The GA by FL may be estimated using OB TBL 1, menu level 3, or the user
programmed OB TBL 2, menu level 1, 2, or 3.
The author field will show O'Brien for OB TBL 1 or the user programmed
title from TBL 2.
AC, mm
GA by AC
AC Table Author
AC is the abdominal circumference last measured. GA by AC is the
gestational age computed from the last abdominal circumference or averaged. AC Table Author is the author of the table used in the gestational age
computation.
The GA by AC may be estimated using OB TBL 1, menu level 4, or the user
programmed OB TBL 2, menu level 4 or 5.
The author field will show Hadlock for OB TBL 1 or the user programmed
title from OB TBL 2.
10-16
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-5-5 Independent Data
Fields (continued)
HC, mm
GA by HC
HC Table Author
HC is the head circumference last measured. GA by HC is the gestational
age computed from the last head circumference or averaged. HC Table
Author is the author of the table used in the gestational age computation.
The GA by HC may be estimated using OB TBL 1, menu level 5, or the user
programmed OB TBL 2, menu level 4 or 5.
The author field will show Hadlock for OB TBL 1 or the user programmed
title from OB TBL 2.
TAD
APD
Cephalic Index
TAD is the transverse abdominal diameter. APD is the abdominal anteriorposterior diameter. Both are obtained only when the abdominal circumference are measured by the two-diameter method. TAD is the first distance
measured and APD is the second.
The cephalic index is the ratio of the two diameters used in the measurement
of the head circumference, according to the formula:
Cephalic index (%) = 100 * BPD/OFD. Cephalic index's normal value is
79±8%.
NOTE: The BPD used in the calculation of cephalic index is obtained
in the measurement of head circumference by two diameters,
and may be different from the value used for estimation of
gestational age and displayed on the summary page.
If the head circumference by two diameters measurement has not been
performed, the cephalic index field is blank.
FL/BPD
FL/AC
HC/AC
46-030370 REV 3
FL/BPD is the ratio of femur length to biparietal diameter, in percent. The
displayed values are used for the calculation. If either is missing, the field
is blank. (For OB TBL 1 only.) FL/BPD's normal ratio is 79±8% (23 weeks
to term).
FL/AC is the ratio of femur length to abdominal circumference, in percent.
The displayed FL and AC values are used for the calculation. If either is
missing, the field is blank. (For OB TBL 1 only.) FL/AC's normal ratio is
22±2% (21 weeks to term).
HC/AC is the ratio of head circumference to abdominal circumference, in
percent. The displayed HC and AC values are used for the calculation. If
either is missing, the field is blank. (For OB TBL 1 only.) HC/AC's normal
ratio varies throughout the pregnancy.
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-17
10-5-5 Independent Data
Fields (continued)
#1 Estimated Fetal Body
Weight (AC/BPD)
The Estimated Fetal Body Weight #1, is computed using a Shepard/
Richards/Berkowitz model. An evaluation of two equations for predicting
weight by ultrasound. (Shepard et al., Am. J. Obstet. Gynecol., 142:47-54,
1982).
EFBW is determined according to the equation:
LOG 10 (EFBW) = 3 - 1.7492 + 0.0166*BPD + 0.0046*AC 0.00002646*AC*BPD
The above formula yields EFBW in kilograms when the AC and BPD are in
centimeters. (The machine automatically makes the conversion from
kilograms to grams and millimeters to centimeters.) (For OB TBL 1 only)
When EFBW is selected, this calculation is made only if AC and BPD
measurements have already been made. Otherwise, the EFBW (BPD, AC)
field to the left on the screen will display U.F. and will be blank in the report
page.
#2 Estimated Fetal Body
Weight (FL/AC)
The Estimated Fetal Body Weight #2 (EFBW) is computed using the
Hadlock Model. (Hadlock, F.B., et al,: Sonographic Estimation of Fetal
Weight, Radiology, 150:535-40, 1984.)
EFBW is determined according to the equation:
LOG10 (EFBW) = 1.3598 + 0.01844*FL + 0.0051*AC - 0.000037*AC*FL
The above formula yields EFBW in grams when the AC and FL are in
millimeters. (The machine automatically makes the conversion from kilograms to grams and millimeters to centimeters.) (For use with OB Table 1
gestational ages only.)
When EFBW is selected, this calculation is made only if AC and FL
measurements have already been made. Otherwise, the EFBW (FL, AC)
field to the left on the screen will display U.F. and will be blank on the report
page.
10-18
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-5-5 Independent Data
Fields (continued)
#3 Estimated Fetal Body
Weight (FL/AC/HC)
The Estimated Fetal Body Weight #3 (EFBW) is computed using the Hadlock,
Harris, Sharman, Deter and Park model. ("Estimation of fetal weight with the
use of head, body and femur measurements—A perspective study." American Journal of Obstetrics and Gynecology, 151:333-337, 1985.)
EFBW is determined according to the equation:
LOG10 (EFBW) = 1.326 - 0.0000326*AC*FL + 0.00107*HC + 0.00438*AC +
0.0158*FL
The above formula yield EFBW in grams when the FL, AC, and HC
measurements are in millimeters. (The machine automatically makes the
conversion from kilograms to grams and millimeters to centimeters) (For OB
TBL 1 only).
When EFBW is selected, this calculation is made only if the FL, AC, and HC
measurement have been made. Otherwise, the EFBW #3 field to the left on
the screen will display U.F. and will be blank on the Report Page.
NOTE: If BPD, FL and AC measurements have already been made,
then both EFBW (BPD,AC) and EFBW (FL,AC) values will be
displayed to the left on the screen and in the report page.
Calculations are made from the last measurement entered or
averaged.
Heart Rate
Amniotic Fluid Index
This is the fetal heart rate, in beats per minute, computed in the CALC 1
function, menu level 3. If this measurement is not made, the field is blank.
The Amniotic Fluid Index is determined by taking a distance measurement of
the amniotic fluid depth in each of four axial quadrants. These four measurements are added together to formulate the Amniotic Fluid Index (AFI).
Normal values are considered to be:
Dr. Rutherford/Dr. Phelan, Obstetrics & Gynecology, Volume 70, No. 3, Part
1, p. 353-6, Sept. 1987.
36 - 40 weeks
0 - 5 cm = very low
8.1 - 18.0 cm = normal
5.1 - 8.0 cm = low
> 18.0 cm = high
Dr. C. S. Smith, The Female Patient, Volume 15, p. 85-97, March 1990.
28 - 40 weeks
15.0 cm = average
> 20.0 - 24.0 = Hydramnios
< 5.0 - 6.0 = Oligohydramnios
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-19
10-5-6 Dependent Data
Fields
The report page contains four fields which are dependent on edit fields.
Table 10-1
Dependent Data Fields
Field
Dependent On
GA by LMP
EDD by LMP
CGA
EDD by CGA
Last menstrual period
Last menstrual period
Include XXX* in CGA? (five fields)
Include XXX* in CGA? (five fields)
*XXX = BPD, CLR, FL, AC or HC.
Illustration 10-6
Dependent Data Fields
EXAM DATE:
NAME:
ID:
REFERRAL:
REFERRED FOR:
04/15/91
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
AGE:
LMP:
GESTATIONAL AGE
GA BY LMP:
BPD(HADLOCK)
OFD
CRL(ROBINSON)
FL(O BRIEN)
HC(HADLOCK)
TAD
APD
AC(HADLOCK)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
CGA:
GRAVIDA:
PARA:
CALCULATIONS
20W3D
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
20W3D
CEPHALIC INDEX:
FL/BPD:
FL/AC:
HC/AC:
EFBW:
#1 (BPD,AC):
#2 (FL,AC):
#3 (FL,AC,HC):
HEART RATE:
AFI:
/
%
%
%
%
GM
GM
GM
BPM
CM
%
EDD BY LMP: 15 NOV 1991
EDD BY CGA: 21 NOV 1991
COMMENTS:
REPORTED BY:
REPORT DATE:
The first two fields are updated whenever you change the LMP date.
The last two fields are updated whenever you change any of the Yes/No
fields determining which gestational ages are included in the Composite
Gestational Age. The fields are computed as defined below:
GA by LMP
GA by LMP is computed from the date of the first day of the Last Menstrual Period, according to the formula:
GA = {exam date} - {last menstrual period}
EDD by LMP
EDD by LMP is the Estimated Delivery Date computed from the date of
the first day of the Last Menstrual Period according to the formula:
EDD = {last menstrual period} + 280 days
10-20
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-5-6 Dependent Data
Fields (continued)
CGA
EDD by CGA
CGA, the Composite Gestational Age, is the arithmetic mean of gestational
ages computed from the selected measurements. If the [Include XXX in]
CGA? field (labeled CGA? on the report page) contains a Y, the corresponding measurement is included in the CGA. Otherwise, it is not included in the
average.
EDD by CGA is the Estimated Delivery Date computed from Composite
Gestational Age according to the formula:
EDD = {exam date} - CGA + 280 days.
EDD by EGA
EDD by EGA is the estimated delivery date computed from the Estimated
Gestational Age at the time of the exam. The formula is:
EDD by EGA = current date = (40 weeks - EGA)
10-5-7 Gestational Age
Error Markers
Whenever three or more gestational age measurements are included in the
CGA (the arithmetic mean of the included gestational ages), an arrow may
appear on the report page to mark the GA which is farthest from the CGA.
This arrow is immediately to the right of the gestational age. This makes it
easy to spot the outlying measurement. If there is a tie between two or more
GAs for the outlying measurement, no arrow will appear. When a hardcopy
print of the screen is made using the RECORD key, the error marker arrow
is temporarily erased and does not appear on the print.
Illustration 10-7
Error Markers
EXAM DATE:
NAME: JANE DOE
ID: 123-45-6789
REFERRAL: DR. J. DOE
REFERRED FOR: TWINS
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
AGE: 32
LMP: 12 JAN 1991
GESTATIONAL AGE
GA BY LMP:
BPD(HADLOCK)
OFD
CRL(ROBINSON)
FL(O BRIEN)
HC(HADLOCK)
TAD
APD
AC(HADLOCK)
TEST1 (TBL 2)
TEST2 (TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
CGA:
04/15/91
GRAVIDA: 2
PARA: 2
CALCULATIONS
52mm
75mm
22mm
38mm
171mm
21W6D
CGA? Y
09W0D
21W3D
19W3D
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
139mm
52mm
75mm
19W0D
20W4D
21W1D
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
18W1D
CEPHALIC INDEX:
FL/BPD:
FL/AC:
HC/AC:
EFBW:
#1 (BPD,AC):
#2 (FL,AC):
#3 (FL,AC,HC):
HEART RATE:
AFI:
52 / 75
70%
73%
27%
123%
364GM
375GM
370GM
125BPM
180CM
70%
EDD BY LMP:
EDD BY CGA:
COMMENTS:
REPORTED BY:
46-030370 REV 3
REPORT DATE:
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-21
10-5-8 Hardcopy Output
of the Report
Page
The RT 3200 Advantage - III video printer generates hardcopy prints. To
print the report, press the RECORD key when the report page is on display.
When you press RECORD, the system modifies the displayed report page
before starting the recording process. First, it erases the gestational age
error marker (the arrow which may appear to the right of a gestational age).
Then, it draws solid white areas at the bottom of the report page. These bars
provide white space on the hardcopy print for your signature and date. After
the exposure, the system erases the bars and restores and GA error marker.
When your RT 3200 Advantage - III is connected to an IBM (or compatible)
computer via the RS-232 Serial Port, and the Report Page is displayed, the
RECORD key will transmit the measurement data on the Report Page to the
computer. When you press RECORD, the data is transmitted and an
Acknowledge will display in the Reported By area to confirm the transmission of data has been received by the computer.
Illustration 10-8
Report Page Ready to Print
EXAM DATE:
NAME: JANE DOE
ID: 123-45-6789
REFERRAL:
REFERRED FOR:
04/15/91
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
AGE:
LMP:
GRAVIDA:
PARA:
GESTATIONAL AGE
GA BY LMP:
BPD(HADLOCK)
OFD
CRL(ROBINSON)
FL(O BRIEN)
HC(HADLOCK)
TAD
APD
AC(HADLOCK)
TEST1 (TBL 2)
TEST2 (TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
CGA:
CALCULATIONS
52mm
75mm
22mm
38mm
171mm
21W6D
CGA? Y
09W0D
21W3D
19W3D
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
139mm
52mm
75mm
19W0D
20W4D
21W1D
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
CEPHALIC INDEX:
FL/BPD:
FL/AC:
HC/AC:
EFBW:
#1 (BPD,AC):
#2 (FL,AC):
#3 (FL,AC,HC):
HEART RATE:
AFI:
52 / 75
70%
73%
27%
123%
364GM
375GM
370GM
125BPM
180CM
70%
EDD BY LMP:
EDD BY CGA:
18W1D
COMMENTS: TYPE IN THREE LINES OF COMMENTS HERE.
REPORTED BY:
10-22
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
REPORT DATE:
46-030370 REV 3
10-5-9 Gestational Age
Estimation
NOTE: To obtain the circumference for GA estimation, use the Trace/
Area function, the two-diameter method or the ellipse
measurement.
"Y" (yes)
"N" (no)
"D" (delete)
use this measurement for CGA
do not use this measurement for CGA
erase or delete this measurement
NOTE: Selecting "D" (Delete) will erase the measurement from the
report page. However, as long as the measurements are not
deleted from the averaging page it can be recalled by entering
a "Y".
Illustration 10-9
Gestational Age Estimation
EXAM DATE:
NAME: JANE DOE
ID: 123-45-6789
REFERRAL: DR. J. DOE
REFERRED FOR: TWINS
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
AGE: 32
LMP: 12 OCT 1989
GESTATIONAL AGE
GA BY LMP:
BPD(HADLOCK)
OFD
CRL(ROBINSON)
FL(O BRIEN)
HC(HADLOCK)
TAD
APD
AC(HADLOCK)
TEST1 (TBL 2)
TEST2 (TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
(TBL 2)
CGA:
04/15/91
GRAVIDA: 2
PARA: 2
CALCULATIONS
52mm
75mm
22mm
38mm
171mm
21W6D
CGA? Y
09W0D
21W3D
19W3D
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
139mm
52mm
75mm
19W0D
20W4D
21W1D
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
CGA? Y
CGA? N
CGA? N
CGA? N
18W1D
CEPHALIC INDEX:
FL/BPD:
FL/AC:
HC/AC:
EFBW:
#1 (BPD,AC):
#2 (FL,AC):
#3 (FL, AC,HC):
HEART RATE:
AFI:
52 / 75
70%
73%
27%
123%
364GM
375GM
370GM
125BPM
180CM
70%
EDD BY LMP:
EDD BY CGA:
COMMENTS:
REPORTED BY:
46-030370 REV 3
REPORT DATE:
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-23
10-5-9 Gestational Age
Estimation
(continued)
If you selected menu level 4 (AC), the transverse diameter is stored as the
TAD, and the anterior-posterior diameter is stored as the APD, both of which
are shown on the report page.
If you selected menu level 5 (HC), the system uses the anterior-posterior
diameter to compute cephalic index. BPD is not shown on the report page
unless you enter a separate BPD estimation. The occipito-frontal diameter
is stored as the OFD, which is shown on the report page and used in the
computation of the cephalic index.
NOTE: The OB TBL 1 or OB TBL 2 function identifies and stores the
diameter and circumference data as pertaining to either the
head or abdomen.
There are three possible sources for the circumference data used to
estimate gestational age by HC or AC. The first is a circumference by using
the TRACE/AREA function. The second is a circumference by computing
two diameters. The third is the ellipse measurement.
10-5-10 Measurement
Averaging Page
The Measurement Averaging Page enables the display and selection of
measurement values that will be included or excluded from the data to be
used in the calculation of results displayed on the main OB Report Page. For
more details, refer to Section 10-7.
10-24
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-6 Report Page Sequencing
Illustration 10-10
Report Page Sequencing
OB
Report
Page
Anatomical
Survey
Page
Measurement
Averaging
Page
User
Comments
Library
OB Report Page Display Sequence
Urology
Report
Page
User
Comments
Library
Urology Report Page Sequence
GYN
Report
Page
IVF
Report
Page
User
Comments
Library
GYN/IVF Report Page Sequence
Function
OB
Tbl 1
OB
Tbl 2
Calc 1
Calc 2
Calc 3
Map
To move from page to page, use the LEFT/RIGHT ARROW key at the
bottom of the Function Key group. Page selections wrap around from end
to end by repeatedly pressing an arrow key, right or left.
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-25
10-7 Measurement Averaging
Page
10-7-1 Overview
The Measurement Averaging Page enables the display and selection of
measurement values that will be included or excluded from the data to be
used in the calculation of results displayed on the main OB Report Page.
Illustration 10-11
Measurement Averaging Page
EXAM DATE:
NAME:
ID:
PRE-PROGRAMMED TABLES
1
2
3
BPD
USE?
04/15/91
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
AVERAGE ALL? Y
USER-PROGRAMED TABLES
AVE
1
2
3
AVE
N
N
N
USE?
N
N
N
N
N
N
USE?
N
N
N
N
N
N
USE?
N
N
N
N
N
N
USE?
N
N
N
N
N
N
USE?
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
TAD
USE?
APD
USE?
N
N
N
CRL
USE?
FL
USE?
HC
USE?
AC
USE?
OTHER MEASUREMENTS
OFD
USE?
N
N
10-7-2 The Report
Display
Measurement results for each of the five factory programmed tables from
OB TBL 1 and the five user programmed tables from OB TBL 2 are
displayed. For each of the ten tables the current measurement, two prior
measurements and the computed gestational age for that table is displayed.
(The average is the mean measurement value and the gestational age is
computed from that mean value.)
OFD<TAD<APD are displayed and made available for averaging at the
bottom of the screen. Under each gestational age calculation is a flag which
determines if the measurement shall be included in the average for the main
report page. The choices to be entered here are:
"Y" (yes)
"N" (no)
"D" (delete)
use this measurement for averaging
do not use this measurement for averaging
erase or delete this measurement
NOTE: Selecting "D" (delete) is irreversible. If there is no measurement
with a "Y", the average will not be displayed.
10-26
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-7-3 Editing the Page
Move about the Averaging Page in the same manner as the Main OB Report
Page. Use the TRACKBALL, SHIFT and ARROW keys or the Return key.
Only the flag fields can be edited. You can not edit any of the measurements
displayed on this page.
You can, however, choose to exclude or delete specific measurements by
using "N" or "D" in the flag field.
10-7-4 Average All
The default state for the measurement flag fields is selected by the
"AVERAGE ALL" field. The AVERAGE ALL field is non-volatile and will be
remembered even after power down.
If the AVERAGE ALL field is "N" (no), then the default for the current
measurement is "Y" (yes) and the two prior measurements will be "N" (no).
"No" is the factory and service default setting for the AVERAGE ALL field.
If the measurement Averaging Page is never used, the AVERAGE ALL
selection is likely to be "N" (no).
If the AVERAGE ALL field is set to "Y" (yes), the default for all measurement
fields will be "Y" (yes). It is assumed that all measurements (up to three) will
be averaged as a matter of regular procedure.
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-27
10-8 Anatomical Survey
Report Page
The Anatomical Survey Page provides a checklist that promotes routine
thorough reporting of obstetrical ultrasound exams. To reach the Anatomical Survey Page, use the function ARROW keys. Refer to Illustration 10-10.
For each of the nine pre-programmed and up to four user programmed
anatomical features, the operator is prompted to indicate whether the
feature was imaged (yes/no) and the feature's appearance (normal/abnormal).
Illustration 10-12
Anatomical Survey Summary
EXAM DATE:
NAME:
ID:
REFERRAL:
REFERRED FOR:
04/15/91
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
LMP:
GRAVIDA:
PARA:
ANATOMICAL SURVEY
IMAGED?
HEAD
FOUR CHAMBER VIEW
SPINE
STOMACH
KIDNEYS
CORD INSERTION
BLADDER
UPPER EXTREMITIES
LOWER EXTREMITIES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
APPEARANCE
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
COMMENTS:
REPORTED BY:
REPORT DATE:
10-8-1 Page Description
At the top of the Anatomical Survey Page is patient data similar to the main
OB Report Page (the difference is the age parameter). This information can
NOT be edited on the Anatomical Survey Page. The operator must edit this
information on the main OB Report Page display.
When the Anatomical Survey Page is enabled, the cursor will appear at the
"yes/no" field of the first feature on the checklist.
Both "yes" and "no" will be displayed for each item on the checklist. The
words "normal" and "abnormal" are not initially displayed.
10-28
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-8-2 Editing the Page
The "yes" or "no" is selected for the active anatomical feature by pressing
a "Y" for yes or "N" for no on the alphanumeric keyboard.
If "yes" is selected, then the "no" will be erased. The words "normal" and
"abnormal" will appear on the line to the right. The cursor will automatically
move to the "normal/abnormal" field.
If the feature appears normal, press "n" on the keyboard and the word
"abnormal" is erased.
In either case, the cursor will move to the "yes/no" field for the next item on
the checklist.
Continue to edit each pre-programmed and user programmed feature.
If "no" is selected, then the "yes" will be erased. The cursor will move to the
"yes/no" field for the next item on the checklist.
10-8-3 Comments
The operator can enter comments into the three line comment field at the
bottom of the screen.
This field is identical to the comment field that appears at the bottom of the
main OB Report Page.
If changes are made in either page, they will automatically appear in the
other as well.
10-8-4 User Programmed
Features
The operator can add up to four additional anatomical features to the list.
Items are added by moving the cursor to the 20 character name field and
entering the text.
Whether the name field is blank or not, the item is included in the list and the
"yes/no" entries appear on the "IMAGED?" column.
The user programmed anatomical features will be stored in non-volatile
memory and will be saved even after the scanner is powered down.
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-29
10-9 User Programmable
Comments Library
10-9-1 Overview
A User Programmable Comments Library is available to assist the operator
in entering frequently used words and phrases. These words or phrases
may be used often in annotating a scan image or commenting on a report
page such as the OB, Urology or Anatomical Survey Reports.
Illustration 10-13
User Programmable Comments
Library
USER PROGRAMMABLE COMMENTS LIBRARY
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
CODE
TEXT
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
10-9-2 Selecting the
Comments
Library
To use this feature, you must first enter one of the Report Page sequences.
Press CONTROL, O to enter the OB Report sequence. Press CONTROL,
U to enter the Urology Page sequence. To reach the Library, use the
function ARROW keys. Refer to Illustration 10-13 for an example of the
Programmable Comments Library Page.
Each Report Page sequence has a user programmable comments library
page. These are the SAME comments library. There is only one comments
library page common to all applications of the RT 3200 Advantage - III.
10-30
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-9-3 Programming
Comments
Control
O
Control
U
Control
M
Select the OB Report sequence, Urology Report sequence or GYN/IVF
Report Sequence.
▼
Select the AVERAGING PAGE, ANATOMICAL SURVEY and USER COMMENTS LIBRARY with the ARROW keys. The cursor will be at the first
character position of the first code field.
▼
Alphanumeric
Keyboard
▼
Enter the desired code, using up to four letters.
Press RETURN. The cursor then moves to the text string field.
Return
▼
Alphanumeric
Keyboard
▼
Enter the desired text string, using up to forty characters.
Press RETURN. The cursor moves to the code field of the second line.
Return
▼
Continue entering your code and text in the above fashion.
Control
If you need to move a specific line in the comments library, using the
TRACKBALL or SHIFT and the ARROW keys on the alphanumeric
keyboard.
When you have completed entering your comments, press CONTROL to
exit the Report Page sequence and exit the control function.
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-31
10-9-4 Editing the
Comments
Library
Control
O
Control
U
Control
M
To edit the Comments Library, select the OB, GYN/IVF or Urology Summary
Report sequence.
▼
Use the function ARROW keys to select the Programmable Comments
Library page.
▼
Directional
Keys
T.B.
Use the TRACKBALL or KEYBOARD ARROW keys to select the appropriate comment line.
▼
Alphanumeric
Keyboard
Enter a new four character code word if necessary.
▼
Return
T.B.
▼
Alphanumeric
Keyboard
Press RETURN or move the TRACKBALL to store that code word. The
cursor will move to the text field.
Enter the new forty character maximum text field desired.
▼
Press RETURN or move the TRACKBALL to store the new text words.
T.B.
Return
Repeat as necessary to edit the desired comment lines.
Control
10-32
Press the CONTROL key to exit the report page function and exit the control
function.
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-9-5 Using the
Comments
Library
Comment text from the library can be inserted on to the ultrasound image
display as well as in the comment field of the OB Report Page, Urology
Report Page, Anatomical Summary Page, GYN Report Page and IVF
Report Page.
To place comments in the Report page, you must display that report page
and move the cursor down to the appropriate spot in the comment field.
To place comments on the ultrasound image, press the COMMENT key
while in the comment mode.
Once you have moved the cursor to the appropriate spot in the image or
report page, type in the code word (maximum four characters). Press
ENTER. The comments library will be searched for the code word. If the
code word is found, the code is overwritten by the text string on the image
or report page. The text will wrap at the right margin, just as if you had
entered it from the keyboard.
NOTE: If you are using more than one pre-programmed comment
consecutively, be sure to place a space between each comment
selection.
Code characters must be entered by the keyboard. Preexisting characters
or text will not be appended to keyboard input to form a code.
Example:
Suppose the comment field contains the text
"PQRSTUVWXYZ". The user positions the cursor after
the "Z" and enters "AB" and presses ENTER. The system
will search the library for the code "AB", not "YZAB". If the
code "AB" is found, only the "AB" will be replaced with text
from the library.
10-9-6 No Code
If no code is found in the comment library, the system will react in two
different ways.
If you are in the Comment Mode the system assumes that the characters
preceding the ENTER were normal text. It assumes the user pressed
ENTER in order to exit the Comment Mode and make the keyboard entries
permanent. Thus an exit will be performed.
If you are in the comment field of a Report Page, the code search failure is
recognized as an error. The system will beep and the code entered remains
on the comment field.
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-33
10-10 Urology Summary
Report Page
10-10-1
Overview
The Urology Summary Report Page is provided to improve productivity and
facilitate consistency in Urology procedures.
Illustration 10-14
Urology Summary Page Report
EXAM DATE:
04/15/91
PATIENT DATA
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
NAME:
ID:
AGE:
REFERRAL:
REFERRED FOR:
AP:
PSA:
PPSA:
DRE:
XXX:
XXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
BASED ON VOLUME 1
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
VOLUME
VOLUME
VOLUME
#####.# cm3
#####.# cm3
#####.# cm3
#1
#2
#3
LESION SITE:
1
2
3
4
✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳
✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳
✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
BIOPSY
YES NO
YES NO
YES NO
YES NO
COMMENTS:
REPORTED BY:
REPORT DATE:
The Urology Report Page contains patient data information, measurement
results of three volumes, specific exam comments, lesion site comments
and general comments.
The Patient Name and ID can not be edited on this report page. They were
entered prior to the start of the exam by using the ID/NAME key.
There are three fields in which measured volumes are reported. These
volumes are obtained from the volume measurements taken in the CALC
1 and/or CALC 2 menus. The first volume measurement taken is recorded
as Volume #1. The second and third measurements are recorded as
Volume #2 and Volume #3, respectively.
The system will store the three most recent volume measurements. If a
fourth volume measurement is made, Volume #1 is erased. Volume #2
becomes #1. Volume #3 becomes #2 and the forth measurement is Volume
#3. The very first measurement is lost.
In the space to the right of each volume measurement, the user can type in
comments pertinent to that particular volume measurement.
NOTE: If the volume measurements were taken in the CALC 2 STVOL
(stepper volume) selection, the word "STEPPER" will appear in
the comment line to the right of the volume measurement.
10-34
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-10-2 Urology Page
Edit Fields
The following fields on the Urology Report Page may be edited while it is
displayed. Use the TRACKBALL, SHIFT plus ARROW or RETURN keys
to move to the desired field to be edited. See Illustration 10-14 for the
location of the edit fields (listed below) on the Urology Report Page.
46-030370 REV 3
Age:
The patient age (3 digits)
Referral:
Name of the referring physician (16 characters)
Referred for:
Reason for the Exam (36 characters)
AP:
Alkaline Phosphatase concentration (12 characters)
PSA:
Prostatic Specific Antigen concentration (12 characters)
PPSA:
On the PPSA line is a non-edit field that corresponds to
the calculation result.
The edit field following the words "BASED ON VOLUME," is a single digit (1, 2, or 3) to indicate which
volume measurement (corresponding to the entire
gland) is used to calculate the PPSA. The volume
chosen is multiplied by the value (0.12 or 0.15) used as
the threshold level. (It is based on standard production
of PSA per gram of volume of prostatic tissue.)
Example: volume of 17.6 x .12 = a 2.1 PPSA.
Predicted PSA=Volume (grams) x 0.12 ng/ml/g.
DRE:
Digital Rectal Exam results (57 characters)
XXX:
Optional User Specific field (3 character name, 57
character text)
Volume 1-3:
Comment line, to the right of each measurement can
be used to describe the volume measurement. (40
characters maximum in each line).
Lesion Site:
Description of each of four lesion sites (4 fields, 20
characters each)
Biopsy:
Indicated whether the lesion site was biopsied. Enter
"Y" for yes and "N" for no.
Comments:
General comments and findings (248 characters in 4
lines).
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-35
10-10-3 Display Urology
Report Page
Control
U
This control function is used to display the Urology Report Page sequence.
DISPLAY
Control
▼
U
CONTROL : ___
Press the CONTROL key.
CONTROL : U___
UROLOGIC REPORT
▼
Press the ENTER key to display the Urology Report Page.
Enter
Press CONTROL again to exit the Report Page function.
10-11 Record Output—Line
Printer
Control
R
L
This Control function selects to modify the output video when the RECORD
key is pressed if a gamma correction curve is used. CONTROL, R, L
disables the gamma correction curve for summary report printing.
DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control
▼
R
▼
L
▼
CONTROL : R ___
RECORD OUTPUT
CONTROL : RL___
RECORD OUTPUT/SELECT LINE PRINTER
(Gamma correction curve will not be used when RECORD is pressed. System
beeps after record process has started.)
Press the ENTER key.
Enter
NOTE: CONTROL, R, L is used for summary report printing only.
10-36
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
10-12 Prostate Body Marker
Patterns
Additional prostate body marker patterns are added for urology exams.
Illustration 10-15
Prostate Body Marker Patterns
PACKAGE D
Prostate Patterns-Inverted
PACKAGE E
Prostate Patterns
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-37
10-13
Calc 3
Provides two sets of calculations for GYN and IVF evaluations. Results are
displayed on the GYN and IVF Summary Report Pages, respectively.
GYN—Allows for the measurement of the cervix, endometrium, uterus, right
ovary and left ovary. Measurements are entered on the GYN Summary
Report Page (see Illustration 10-16) and the volume of the organ is
calculated.
Illustration 10-16
GYN Report Page
IVF—Allows for the measurement of up to six follicles in the right ovary and
six follicles in the left ovary. The measurements are recorded on the IVF
Summary Report Page (see Illustration 10-17) where the mean diameter
and volume are calculated for each follicle measured.
EXAM DATE:
NAME:
ID:
REFERRAL:
REFERRED FOR:
08/15/92
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
AGE:
LMP:
GRAVIDA:
PARA:
GYN REPORT
L (cm)
W (cm)
H (cm)
VOL (cm 3 )
COMMENTS
CERVIX
ENDOMETRIUM
UTERUS
RIGHT OVARY
LEFT OVARY
COMMENTS:
REPORTED BY:
REPORT DATE:
Illustration 10-17
IVF Report Page
EXAM DATE:
NAME:
ID:
REFERRAL:
REFERRED FOR:
08/15/92
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
AGE:
LMP:
GRAVIDA:
PARA:
FERTILITY REPORT
RIGHT OVARY FOLLICLES
DIAMETERS (mm)
+
x
MEAN
1
2
3
4
5
6
*
VOL
(cm 3)
LEFT OVARY FOLLICLES
DIAMETERS (mm)
+ x
MEAN
1
2
3
4
5
6
*
VOL
(cm 3 )
FOLLICULAR OBSERVATIONS
VOLUME CHANGES
:
BORDER APPEARANCE :
CONTENTS
:
OTHER
:
COMMENTS:
REPORTED BY:
10-38
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
REPORT DATE:
46-030370 REV 3
10-14 Cine Memory Operation
(OPTION)
10-14-1
Overview
Cine Memory is an option to the RT 3200 Advantage-I Version 5 software
system. Cine Memory is free running storage of 32 image frames in B-Mode
operation only. Free running means that during B-Mode operation only, the
system displays the current image and has in memory the 32 previous image
frames.
The 32 images represent approximately two seconds of scan time. The
operator essentially has two seconds added to the response time needed
to freeze an image. The obvious advantage being that the operator can
freeze the image and recall a previous image from memory. If the patient
moved or breathed just as the image was frozen, an image prior to
movement can be recalled for taking measurements, recording or printing.
The only functional difference between a system with or without the Cine
Memory option is apparent after an image is frozen and the GAIN control
knob is rotated.
10-14-2
Single Image
Operation
Cine Memory functions in B-Mode only. When FREEZE is activated, the
image is displayed on the monitor as before, with the following exceptions:
•
Gain, Dynamic Range and Focal Zone numbers are no longer displayed
after the GAIN control knob is rotated for Cine Memory review.
•
The Cine Memory position indicator replaces Gain, Dynamic Range and
Focal Zone after the GAIN control knob is rotated.
Illustration 10-18
Cine Memory Position Indicator
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 15 : 25
S 3.5MHz
x1.0
GE
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-39
10-14-2
Single Image
Operation
(continued)
The arrow on the position indicator will always be on the far right side initially.
This is the most current image.
Turning the GAIN control knob counterclockwise allows for the review of any
of the previously stored 32 image frames. The arrow pointer moves with
every "click" of the GAIN control knob to show the relative position of the
image in Cine Memory.
Rotating the GAIN control knob clockwise reviews images in the opposite
direction. Once a left or right limit is reached, the review wraps around to the
opposite end and continues displaying images from Cine Memory with
GAIN control knob rotation.
After choosing the desired image, the operator can make measurements
and have them entered on a report page. Annotations can also be added
or pictures taken on the thermal printer or multi-image camera.
If the GAIN control knob is rotated, the measurement cursors will be erased.
They are not stored with the image. It is not possible to rotate back and have
the measurement cursors reappear.
Measurements displayed on the left side of the display will remain when the
GAIN control knob is rotated. Press the OFF key to remove this measurement data from the display.
Annotations are also separate from measurement cursors. Annotations will
remain when the GAIN control knob is rotated. Press the ERASE key to
remove annotations.
10-14-3
Multiple Image
Operation
Multiple Image operation functions like single image Cine Memory. Cine
images are available for the last side (right or left) frozen. The Cine position
indicator, measurements and annotations work as previously explained.
Cine Memory is not available for both sides (right and left) simultaneously.
It is only available for the side showing the Cine position indicator. When
switching sides, the Cine Memory function switches to the active side.
10-40
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
Illustration 10-19
Cine Memory Right Side
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 15 : 25
CA 5MHz
1.0
G66D54T60
GE
Illustration 10-20
Cine Memory Left Side
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 15 : 25
CA 5MHz
1.0
GE
46-030370 REV 3
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
10-41
This page intentionally left blank.
10-42
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES
46-030370 REV 3
Index
Symbols
7.0 MHz Transaxial Probe. See Urology
A
AB (Calculation of Ratio) 6-37
AC (Abdominal Circumference). See OB TBL 1: AC
(Abdominal Circumference)
Accessory Panels
Lower 8-3
Layout 8-4
Upper 8-5
Layout 8-5
Acoustic Levels A-3
Measurement Basis B-1
Notes B-1
Additional Report Pages
Report Page Sequencing 10-25
AFI (Amniotic Fluid Index) 6-54
Anatomical Survey Page
Comments 10-29
Editing the Page 10-29
Page Description 10-28
Report Page Sequencing 10-25
User Programmed Features 10-29
Area Measurement 4-8
Available Options 1-4
B
B-Mode Display Selection 3-7. See also Front
Panel
B-Mode Presetting
Control, B 5-4
B/M-Mode Display Selection 3-8. See also Front
Panel
Biopsy Guideline
ATV Probe Biopsy Guideline 5-27
CA/CB Probe Guideline 5-28
MAGGI™ guides 5-26, 5-28
Ultra Pro™ guides 5-26, 5-28
Control, L, 1 5-25
CTV Probe Guideline 5-27
D Probe Guideline 5-29
F Probe Guideline 5-29
H Probe Guideline 5-30
Illustrations 5-27
LP Probe Guideline 5-30
R Probe Guideline 5-31
RA Probe Needle Placement Grid 5-32
Single Keystroke Operation 3-16
46-030370 REV 3
Body Pattern Controls 3-12. See also Front Panel
Body Marker Package Illustrations 3-13, 5-23
Control, J, 1-2-3 5-22
BPD (Biparietal Diameter). See OB TBL 1: BPD
(Biparietal Diameter)
C
Calc 1 6-22
A/B (Calculation of Ratio) 6-37
Circumference 6-23
Heart Rate 6-33
Velocity 6-35
Volume 6-26
Calc 2 6-39
Amniotic Fluid Index 6-54
Estimated Date of Confinement 6-40
Estimated Fetal Body Weight 6-41, 10-9
HIP Dysplasia Calculation 10-6
Stepper Volume (STVOL) 7-3
Calc 3
GYN 10-38
IVF 10-38
Cine Memory
Multiple Image Operation 10-40
Overview 10-39
Single Image Operation 10-39
Circumference 6-23
Circumference Measurement 4-6
Clamp, Mount 7-15
Cleaning and Inspecting C-1
Clock Readjustment
Date
Control, C, D 5-5
Time
Control, C, T 5-6
Comment Key 3-14. See also Front Panel
Control Key Functions 5-1, 6-16
Summary 5-3
Control Parameters
Which Affect Acoustic Sound
B/M-Mode A-1
Focus A-1
M-Mode A-1
CRL (Crown Rump Length). See OB TBL 1: CRL
(Crown Rump Length)
INDEX-1
Index (continued)
D
G
Dimensions
RT 3200 1-6
Display Adjustment. See Monitor: Display Adjustment
Display Formats
B/M-Mode Format 1-11
Dual B-Mode Format 1-11
Single B-Mode Format 1-10
Display OB Report Page. See Gestational Summary
Report
Display Scale Keys 3-5. See also Front Panel
Distance Measurement 4-4
Dotted Line On/Off
Control, Q 5-33
Dynamic Range 3-4. See also Front Panel
Generic Measurements 4-1
Calculation Error Messages 4-10
Gestational Data
Editing Gestational Age Data
Control, G, 1-2-3-4-5 5-18
Programming Gestational Age Data
Control, G, 0 5-16
Gestational Report Page
Measurement Averaging Page. See Measurement
Averaging Page
Gestational Summary Report
Controlling Cursor Motion 10-11
Dependent Data Fields 10-20
Displaying and Exiting 10-11
Displaying the Report Page 10-10
Edit Fields 10-13
Editing the Report Page
Controlling Cursor Motion 10-12
Error Markers 10-21
Exiting the Report Page 10-11
Gestational Age Estimation 10-23
Hardcopy Output 10-22
Independent Data Fields 10-15
Measurement Averaging 10-24, 10-26
Overview 10-10
Report Page Sequencing 10-25
GYN 10-38
E
Echo Gain Control 3-4. See also Front Panel
Echo Level Measurement
Arbitrary Area
Control, E, 0 5-9
Fixed Area
Control, E, 1-2-3 5-8
EDC (Estimated Date of Confinement) 6-40
EFBW (Estimated Fetal Body Weight)
#1 (BPD/AC) 6-41
#2 (FL/AC) 6-42
#3 (FL/AC/HC) 10-9, 10-19
Electrical Requirements 1-5
Ellipse Measurements 10-4
Error Messages
Measurement Calculation 4-10
F
Features 1-3
Film Development Time 5-15
Control, F, 1-2-3-4 5-15
FL (Femur Length). See OB TBL 1: FL (Femur
Length)
Focus Selections 3-5. See also Front Panel
Foot Switch Connection 1-18
Frame Averaging On/Off
Control, W 5-35
Freeze Key 3-12. See also Front Panel
Front Panel 2-3
Function Key Selections 6-1
Function Keys 3-16
INDEX-2
H
Hardware Description 1-8
HC (Head Circumference). See OB TBL 1: HC
(Head Circumference)
Heart Rate 6-33
High Frame Rate On/Off
Control, K 5-24
HIP (HIP Dysplasia) 10-6
Histogram
Arbitrary Area
Control, E, H, 0 5-13, 5-14
Fixed Area
Control, E, H, 1-2-3 5-12
Hospital Name
Control, H 5-20
46-030370 REV 3
Index (continued)
I
ID/Name Key 3-3. See also Front Panel
Image Direction Keys 3-5. See also Front Panel
Image Scroll Keys 3-6. See also Front Panel
Inspection
Monthly C-8
Introduction 1-3
Inverse
Control, I, 1-2-3-4 5-21
IVF 10-38
K
Keyboard Illumination
3-14. See also Front Panel
L
Lever, Locking 7-15
M
M-Mode
Sweep Speed 3-9
M-Mode Display Selection 3-8. See also Front
Panel
Maintenance
Daily Check List E-1
Monthly Check List E-1
Weekly Check List E-1
Map Package. See Mapping
Control, N 5-33
Mapping
Package A
Level 1 6-58
Level 2 6-58
Level 3 6-59
Level 4 6-59
Level N 6-57
Package B
Level 1 6-60
Level 2 6-61
Level 3 6-61
Level 4 6-62
Level N 6-60
Measurement Averaging Page
Average All 10-27
Editing the Page 10-27
Report Page Sequencing 10-25
The Report Display 10-26
Measurement Keys 3-15
Mechanical Stepper. See Urology
46-030370 REV 3
Monitor
Display Adjustment 1-15
Height Adjustment 1-17
Multi-Image Camera Connection 8-14
Multiple Image Display 3-9. See also Front Panel
Maximum Number of Images 3-10
N
New Patient Key 3-3. See also Front Panel
O
OB Report. See Gestational Summary Report
OB TBL 1
AC (Abdominal Circumference) 6-10
AC Factory Stored Table 6-11
AC/HC (Two Diameter Method) 6-14
BPD (Biparietal Diameter) 6-4
BPD Factory Stored Table 6-5
CRL (Crown Rump Length) 6-6
CRL Factory Stored Table 6-7
FL (Femur Length) 6-8
FL Factory Stored Table 6-9
HC (Head Circumference) 6-12
HC Factory Stored Table 6-13
OB TBL 2 6-15
Coding Sheet 6-20, 6-21
Editing Gestational Age Data
Control G, 1-2-3-4-5 6-18. See also Control
Key Functions
Programming Gestational Age Data
Control G, 0, 1-2-3-4-5 6-16. See also Control
Key Functions
Options
Multi-Image Camera 8-14
Probe Related 1-4
Recording Devices 1-4
Sony Page Printer 8-6
VCR 8-10
P
Page Printer. See Sony UP-850/UP-870: Installation
Panasonic AG-5200/AG-1260/AG-1270
Installation 8-10
Power-up 1-14
Preset Parameters Key 3-7. See also Front Panel
Probe
Cable Arm Support 1-13
Cleaning C-1, C-2
Illustrations C-4
Connection 1-12
Storage 1-13
INDEX-3
Index (continued)
Probe Selection 3-3. See also Front Panel
Programmable Comments Library
Editing the Comments Library 10-32
No Code 10-33
Overview 10-30
Programming Comments 10-31
Report Page Sequencing 10-25
Selecting the Comments Library 10-30
Using the Comments Library 10-33
R
Record Key 3-14
Record Output
Gamma Curve Selection
Control, R, P-V 5-34
Report Page
Gestational 10-10
GYN 10-38
IVF 10-38
Urology 10-34
Report Page Sequencing 10-25
T
S
Safety ix
Equipment and Personnel
Calculation Formulas and Databases
Infection Control xiii
Prescription Device xiii
Risk of Electrical Shock xiii
Levels of Concern
Attention x
Caution ix
Danger ix
Warning ix
Patient
Acoustic Hazards xii
Diagnostic Information xii
Electrical Hazards xii
Mechanical Hazards xii
Patient Identification xii
Scan Image Adjustment 3-4
SET 6-46, 7-28
Single Keystroke Operation 3-16
Sony SVO-1410
Installation 8-10
Sony UP-890
Installation 8-6
Standard Configuration 1-4
Standard Specifications 1-5
Starting the machine. See Power-up
INDEX-4
Stepper Volume 6-43, 7-3
Basic Principles of Operation 7-24
Calculation Formula 7-23
Stepper Volume Formula 7-23
Sweep Speed 3-9
Symbols. See Warnings and Symbols
System
Cleaning
Console Surfaces C-7
Monitor Face C-7
Multi Imaging Device C-8
Page Printer C-8
Video Cassette Recorder C-8
How to Move the Unit E-2
How to Store the Unit E-1
System Dimensions 1-6
System Set-up 1-12. See also Probe: Cable Arm
Support
xiv
Table, Universal 7-15
Temperature/Humidity Requirements 1-5
Text/Graphics Display On/Off
Control, D 5-7
TGC Slide Pots 3-4. See also Front Panel
Troubleshooting
RT3200 Advantage - I D-1
Sony Page Printer D-2
U
Urology
7.0 MHz Transaxial Probe 7-3
Description 7-3
Factory Presets 7-4
Infection Control 7-7
Parts List 7-3
Patient Preparation 7-7
Patient Scan 7-9
Probe Preparation 7-4
Scanning with Water Path 7-5
System Preparation 7-7
Use with Volume Stepper Device 7-5
Body Patterns 10-37
Mechanical Stepper 7-3
Alternate Assembly 7-17
Cleaning and Sterilization 7-22
Control/Adjustment Description 7-15
Lithotomy (Stirrup) Table Mounting 7-19
Parts Identification 7-13
Periodic Maintenance 7-21
Replacement Parts 7-22
Typical Use 7-20
46-030370 REV 3
Index (continued)
Stepper Volume Calculation 7-3
Basic Principles 7-24
Ellipse Method 6-51, 7-33
Formula 7-23
Increment Selection 6-43, 7-25
Scan Preparation 6-44, 7-26
Trace Method 6-49, 7-31
Two Diameter Method 6-46, 7-28
Summary Report
Overview 10-34
Page Edit Fields 10-35
Page Sequencing 10-25
V
VCR. See Panasonic AG-5200/AG-1260/AG-1270:
Installation; Sony SVO-1410 Installation
Velocity 6-35
Volume 6-26
W
Warnings and Symbols ix
46-030370 REV 3
INDEX-5
This page intentionally left blank
INDEX-6
46-030370 REV 3
Download PDF